Home

Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server with Avaya MCC1 or SCC1

1. m s pall LOMO 1 c r 1 c cadfdcr KLC 031202 Figure notes 1 AHFI110 TDM Bus Terminator Slot 17 6 AHFIIO TDM Bus Terminator Slot 01 2 TDM Local Area Network TDM LAN Pinfield Slot 17 7 Port Media Gateway D 3 TDM bus Cable WP 91716 L3 8 Port Media Gateway C 4 TDM Local Area Network TDM LAN 9 Port Media Gateway B PERON 10 Expansion Control Media Gateway 5 TDM Local Area Network TDM LAN A Pinfield Slot 17 October 2002 129 Install the Stratum 3 clock Install the Stratum 3 clock o AN Oo oa 5 WO N e Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 129 Install and Position Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 129 Connect AC Power to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 129 Check and Connect Commercial AC Power on page 130 Connect DC Power and Ground to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 130 Connect Clock Cabinet Grounding on page 131 Connect Stratum 3 Clock DC Power on page 131 Set the Clock Options on page 131 Cable the Stratum 3 Clock on page 133 Install the Stratum 3 Clock Wiring on page 135 Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 1
2. 9 pcd cdi PDH 101596 Figure notes 1 o ON Oo oO F WO I A n old uu b amp b OO N o Media Gateway Stack DC Power Cabinet DC Power Distribution Unit position to right of the media gateway stack White Wire connect to Circuit Breaker See inset Green Ground Wires and Black Wire connect to the 48 VDC Return Bus 48 VDC Bus Inset 12 in 30 5 cm from floor to DC Power Distribution Unit DC Power Cable to Power Connector on Each Media Gateway DC Power Distribution Unit Power Cord route to rear of DC Power Cabinet Route Power Cord Through Sliding Door Circuit Breaker Supplied 10 32 Screw 10 Star Washer and 10 32 Hex Nut Inset Showing DC Power Connector Male October 2002 113 114 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack DC Power Cabinet Stack Rear GEPUNENCAENE BEN pwrdist4 RBP 052896 Figure notes 1 DC Power Cabinet Stack 2 DC Power Cables Daisy Chained Between DC Power Cabinets 3 Connect to 48 VDC Bus 4 Connect to 48 VDC Return Bus 5 Inset Applies to 48 VDC and 48 VDC Return Buses in All 3 DC Power Cabinets Connect AC Power to DC Power Cabinet A CAUTION Power is present in the media gateway even if the AC power cable is unplugged Turn off the main circuit breaker on the front of the media gateway when procedures require ALL
3. rm gw lili r781851b CJL 030896 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 N Expansion Control Media Gateway A in Stack 1 Circuit Breaker AC Power Receptacle Media Gateway Stack Single Point Ground Block 8 foot 2 5 meters Power Cord National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA 5 15 or 5 20 Receptacle or Equivalent 6 AWG 40 4 mm2 Ground Wire to Approved Ground 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm2 Wire to Coupled Bonding Conductor October 2002 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Set the Ringer Frequency A CAUTION When adding or replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap The default ringer frequency setting on the 1217A power supply for North America is 20 Hz and the international setting can be either 20 Hz or 25 Hz To set the ringer frequency on the 1217A power supply 1 Power down AUDIX and any other circuit pack that might be running an application 2 Power down the media gateway 3 Release both latches on the power supply and slide the unit out of the media gateway 4 Observe the ring frequency switch label on the side of the power supply and locate the switch on the bottom c Set the ring frequency select switch to the appropriate frequency setting 6 Slide the power supply back into the slot and ensure that both latches snap closed Connect the Power Cord into the Power R
4. oll Lel AU NNN 5 o c cadfdcr KLC 031202 AHF110 TDM Bus Terminator TDM Local Area Network TDM LAN Pinfield Slot 17 TDM bus Cable WP 91716 L3 TDM Local Area Network TDM LAN Pinfield Slot 00 AHF110 TDM Bus Terminator Slot 17 O coco Oo 10 AHF110 TDM Bus Terminator Port Media Gateway D Port Media Gateway C Port Media Gateway B Expansion Control Media Gateway A October 2002 121 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Verify Port Media Gateway Address Plugs The address plug is a jumper field on port media gateways J58890H only The address plug is located on the far right hand side of the backplane to the right of slot 00 A group of six pins is labeled for the media gateway carrier jumper connections Verify that the address plug for each port carrier is in the correct location for that carrier See Port Media Gateway Address Plug Location Rear of Media Gateway on page 121 The factory default setting is B callout 2 Port Media Gateway Address Plug Location Rear of Media Gateway 9 m add plug CJL 050906 Figure notes 1 Address Plug shown set to carrier D 5 Right Edge of Media Gateway 2 Carrier B Jumper Location Default 6 Backplane Slot 00 3 Carrier C Jumper Location 7 To Connector Panel 4 Right Edge of Backplane October 2002 122 Installing an A
5. E E E la e 9 Lel Anaa Z c c Z Cc o 5 ET o Tat 5 J oll cy E o c J cadfdcr KLC 031202 October 2002 100 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Figure notes 1 a fF o N TDM Bus Terminator 6 TDM Bus Cable Connector 7 TDM Cable 8 TDM Bus Cable Connector 9 TDM Bus Connector 10 TDM Bus Connector SCCI Media Gateway D SCCI Media Gateway C SCCI Media Gateway B SCCI Media Gateway A October 2002 101 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Perform these tasks before you begin the installation Unpack and Inspect Media Gateways on page 101 Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 129 Check Circuit Packs on page 102 Correct Shipping Errors on page 67 Perform these steps to install the media gateways Position the Media Gateway Stacks on page 103 or Position the Auxiliary Cabinet Optional on page 67 Install Earthquake Protection for Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway on page 10
6. iii TRA ledlups KLC 030102 Figure notes 1 Normal mode indicator 5 Off button 2 Battery mode indicator 6 On button 3 Bypass mode indicator 7 Bar graph indicators 4 Test Alarm reset button 8 Alarm indicators After plugging the UPS in all the LEDs flash briefly After a self test the Normal mode LED flashes indicating that the UPS is in Standby mode For more information on the LEDs refer to the UPS user s guide that comes with the Powerware 9125 UPS Telephone Console LEDS Telephones and attendant consoles have some alarm LEDs that must be checked out Attendant Console LEDs The console has 2 red LEDs labeled ALM and ACK The ALM LED lights steadily when there is a major or minor alarm at the media server The ACK LED lights steadily if the alarm has been successfully reported to INADS If the media server is unable to report the alarm to INADS the LED flashes this signals the attendant to call INADS and report the alarm October 2002 323 Testing the Complete Configuration Terminal Alarm Notification Terminal Alarm Notification is an optional feature that displays several types of alarms on telephones with administered feature buttons or the attendant console A maximum of 10 digital and or hybrid telephones may be used When an alarm occurs the green status LED associated with the assigned button is in a steady state The LED may be turned off by p
7. October 2002 147 MDF Cross Connect Fields MDF Cross Connect Fields Each Main Distribution Frame MDF contains a trunk auxiliary field and a distribution field The trunk auxiliary field contains three cross connect areas The green field terminates the network interface leads from the Central Office CO and provides the terminals to cross connect the leads to the purple or yellow fields as required A single row of the 110 type terminal block can terminate twenty four 1 pair eight 3 pair or twelve 2 pair trunks The purple field terminates the trunk circuits from the 8700 Multi Connect configuration with WP 90929 List 1 or 3 concentrator cables Also 25 pair cables can be used to terminate trunk circuits from the 8700 Multi Connect configuration with each trunk circuit pack connecting to one 25 pair row of the 110 type terminal block Each terminal block row can terminate twenty four 1 pair eight 3 pair or twelve 2 pair trunks The yellow field provides cross connect terminals for all miscellaneous leads from the 8700 Multi Connect configuration such as alarm monitors emergency transfer relay power and attendant console power This field is used for emergency transfer wiring paging equipment music sources and so forth The distribution field contains four cross connect areas The purple field port field terminates 25 pair cables from the S8700 Multi Connect configuration Each line circuit pack connects to o
8. Switch Status Results SW1 OFF minor alarm never output Minor Alarm ON minor alarm is output if holdover occurs Control SW2 OFF major alarm is output and fail lamp lights if 5 VDC Major power is lost and 4 kHz output is lost Alarm Control ON major alarm is output and fail lamp lights if 5 VDC power is lost and 4 kHz output is lost and holdover occurs gt NOTE Only SW 1 and SW2 are used SW1 controls the output of alarm signals from the Stratum 3 Clock circuit pack Composite Clock Timing Output TOCA Circuit Pack Switch Range 1 ft 500 ft 1000 ft 1500 ft 2000 ft 2500 ft 3000 ft 500 1000 0 3m 152m 305m 457 m 610 m 762 m 914 m OFF OFF lt gt ON OFF lt gt OFF ON lt gt ON ON lt gt October 2002 133 Install the Stratum 3 clock gt NOTE Set switches 1 and 2 according to the distance from the Stratum 3 clock to the 8700 Media Server for Multi connect configuration Set switch 3 to ON Set switch 4 to OFF Cable the Stratum 3 Clock Typical Connections to Stratum 3 Clock on page 133 shows typical connections to a Stratum 3 Clock cabinet Connections are made through the yellow field cross connect A custom Y cable H600 274 connects the CSU t
9. fe f 1 2 S xu ye Bo 2 l Va 27 3 TTSLYqIT 3 9 l N E ft NS RT 4 28 5 Dd x C 584 5 l l 3 6 6 6 6 t7 7i 7 i 9 wid 3pm PDH 011397 Figure notes 1 Port Circuit Pack 5 Adjunct Power 2 Media Gateway Connector Pins 6 Output From Information Outlet 3 Pair Modularity 4 Pair Modularity 3 Main Distribution Frame MDF Pins 7 Voice or Data Terminal Pins 3 Pair Modularity 4 Inputto Information Outlet 4 Pair Modularity Adjunct Power Connection Locations Example Adjunct Power Connections on page 254 shows typical connection locations for adjunct power Adjunct power for station equipment may be supplied from the equipment room satellite location or the work location For this figure the following example is used 1 If 25 telephones are connected to the media gateway and all 25 telephones need adjunct power install a bulk power supply in the equipment room 2 If only ten of the telephones need adjunct power install a bulk power supply at the satellite location 3 If only one telephone needs adjunct power install the individual power supply at the work location October 2002 254 Installing and Wiring Telephones Example Adjunct Power Connections Figure notes 1 Typical Display Telephone 2 Individual Power Supply Such as 1151A1 or 1151A2 Info
10. 1 Plug the battery connector into the 48 VDC Batteries connector on the rear of the J58890CH 1 Power Distribution Unit CAUTION Power is present in the media gateway even if the AC power cable is unplugged When procedures require ALL power to be removed from the media gateway and to prevent unnecessary discharging of the battery turn off the main circuit breaker located on the front of the power distribution unit October 2002 77 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 2 Be sure the main power to the power distribution unit is OFF 3 Atthe power distribution unit set all carrier circuit breakers OFF Typical Small Battery Assembly Battery connector psdfbatb RPY 061797 Connect Small Battery Holdover Connect the small battery holdover cable to J20 See Power Distribution Unit J58890CH on page 79 October 2002 78 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Power Distribution Unit J58890CH psdf002i KLC 012400 Figure notes External Alarm Cable Connector RPO cable Circuit Breakers Pin 6 RPO Pin 2 RPO External Alarm Cable oa 5 QO N Connect Large Battery Holdover When using large battery holdover 1 battery media gateway is required for every 8700 Multi Connect configuration media gateway requiring holdover The 24 cell battery media gateway must have a float voltage of 54 2 VDC 1 Connect the 48 VDC cable to the large battery c
11. e Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet on page 129 e Check Circuit Packs on page 66 e Correct Shipping Errors on page 67 Perform these tasks to install the media gateways e Position the Media Gateway on page 67 e Position the Auxiliary Cabinet Optional on page 67 and Install Auxiliary Cabinet Equipment on page 68 e Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway on page 68 if required Ay WARNING If the approved ground or approved floor ground can only be accessed inside a dedicated power equipment room then connections to this ground should be made by a licensed electrician See Approved Grounds for more information e Connect AC Power and Ground on page 71 or Connect DC Power and Ground on page 81 e Connect Remote Power Off Cable on page 90 Connect External Alarm Cable on page 93 Interconnect cabling between port networks Direct connect to rack hardware Direct connect to each port network duplex and high critical Switch connect to port networks duplex and high critical 1 Check the customer s order and the shipping packing lists to confirm all equipment is present 2 Check the S8700 Multi Connect configuration adjuncts for damage and report all damage according to local shipping instructions 3 Ifany equipment is missing report the information to your Avaya representative Unpack and Inspect Media Gateway
12. CAUTION A media gateway may weigh as much as 800 Ib 363 kg and may be top heavy Use extreme caution October 2002 66 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 1 Check the status of the SHOCKWATCH and or TILTWATCH indicators on the container If the container has been shaken or tilted beyond specifications the indicators are red indicating potential damage Report any damage according to local shipping instructions Ad DANGER Take care to avoid injury while cutting and removing the 2 metal bands 2 Unpack the media gateway and remove all packing material 3 Move the media gateway into its proper position 4 Do not adjust the leveling feet at this time Unpack and Inspect Auxiliary Cabinet The auxiliary cabinet can be positioned adjacent to the control hardware in the rack or any media gateway 1 Check the status of the SHOCKWATCH and or TILTWATCH indicators on the container If the container has been shaken or tilted beyond specifications the indicators are red indicating potential damage Report any damage according to local shipping instructions Ay DANGER Take care to avoid injury while cutting and removing the 2 metal bands 2 Unpack the cabinet and remove all packing material 3 Move the cabinet into its proper position 4 Remove the lower rear panel from the auxiliary cabinet gt NOTE You reinstall the lower rear panel when the installation is completed Check Circuit Packs 1 Ensure all circuit pac
13. From the rear of the media gateway 2 Connect a 259A connector to the Amphenol connector corresponding to each TN799DP slot See Cable Connection for C LAN on page 218 For a pinout of TN799DP see TN799DP Pinout on page 218 October 2002 218 Connecting to the Customer s Network 3 Connectone end of each DWS cable to each 259A connector 4 Install a cable from the media gateway to the network through a hub or 110 purple wall field as required Cable Connection for C LAN 29 cadiclan KLC 031802 Figure notes 1 259A Adapter 3 To Network 2 CAT3 5 Cable with DW8 Connectors TN799DP Pinout Peripheral Backplane Pin 25 Pair Wire Color Lead Name Connector Pin 103 White Orange TD 27 003 Orange White TD 2 104 White Green RD 28 004 Green White RD 3 Install the circuit packs CAUTION When adding or replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap October 2002 219 Connecting to the Customer s Network gt NOTE The TN799DP circuit packs are hot swappable so you do not need to power down the media gateway to install them gt NOTE To properly seat the circuit pack push firmly on the front of the faceplate until the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier Then close the latch until it is fully engaged 1 Insert the TN799DP circuit packs into the port slots identified earlier Administer
14. 56 Configure the Avaya Ethernet Switch if used SNMP community string for Get Set and Trap SECURITY ALERT The Get and Set community name strings are generally configured with default values of Public and Private respectively These community name strings function as passwords for their respective SNMP operation It is always a good idea to change these community name strings to something other than the default values If a Network Management Station NMS is in operation on the network whatever these strings are changed to must be communicated to the NMS administrator If the defaults are left administered this could create a serious security issue For example the default Set community name string with it s widely known value of Private could be used to reconfigure the Ethernet switch via SNMP message 7 When prompted to save configuration type Y 8 When completed disconnect the services laptop computer from the Ethernet switch 9 Iftwo Ethernet switches are present for CNA repeat steps 1 through 8 for the second switch Refer to the Pre Installation Network Planning Forms 88700 Media Server for the proper addresses masks and community strings 10 Ifhigh or critical reliability repeat steps 1 through 8 for the remaining Ethernet switch es Refer to the Pre Installation Network Planning Forms 858700 Media Server for the proper addresses masks and community strings October 2002 57 Customizing the Active Media S
15. SS SS SSS SSS SSS SSW SARS cadscat1 KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Media Gateway B A Ground plate 2 Media Gateway A Lower rear cover 3 Upper rear cover 2 Run the 25 or 50 m green CATS cable from the Ethernet switch through the media gateway using a cable pass thru tool October 2002 195 Connect the Hardware cadscat2 KLC 032602 3 Install the clamp on ferrite on the CATS Ethernet cable Ah WARNING The ferrite must be located as close to the exit of the media gateway as possible October 2002 196 Connect the Hardware cadscat4 KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Media Gateway B 3 Clamp on ferrite 2 Media Gateway A A WARNING The ferrite must be located as close to the exit of the media gateway as possible 4 Connect the green CATS cable to the bottom connector on the front of the TN2312AP IPSI circuit pack in media gateway A October 2002 197 Connect the Hardware cadscat3 KLC 032602 Replace the rear covers and the ground plate Dress the CAT5 Ethernet cable to exit either the left or right side of the media gateway October 2002 198 Connect the Hardware cadscat5 KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Ground Plate 6 Forhigh or critical reliability repeat steps 1 through 5 for the IPSI circuit pack in media gateway B using a red CAT5 Ethernet cable Replace the upper and lower rear covers Replace the ground plate October 200
16. Sample of Port Network Status after Expansion Link is Set S8700 Multi Connect status port network PORT NETWORK STATUS Major Minor Warning Carrier PN Control FIBER PN Alarms Alarms Alarms Locs Active Standby LINK Endpoints Mode 1 1 0 220 01A up up 1 B PNC 01B02 03E04 standby 01B 1 A PNC 01A01 01E04 active TDM Service Control Dedicated TONE Service System System Bus State Channel Tones CLOCK State Clock Tones A in y n 01B in standby standby B in n y 01A in active active Service Major Minor Bus Open Bus PKT State Alarms Alarms Faults Leads 1 in n n 0 0 Command m UN Save Translations if required 1 Type save translations and press Enter to save the translations to the hard drive October 2002 313 Testing the Complete Configuration Testing Telephones and Other Equipment This section describes how to test the telephones and other equipment Perform these tests after the equipment has been wired to the media gateway and after the customer s data for that equipment has been administered The tests are acceptance tests and provide some assurance that the Avaya S8700 Media Server for IP Connect Configuration will perform properly after installation and administration If problems occur or more extensive tests are required refer to the maintenance book for your configuration Task List Perform Acceptance Tests 1 Make Test Calls Test 302C Attendant Console Test Selector Console Test E
17. T f mecs 0004 1 PDH 062596 Figure notes 1 Wall Mounting Plate 4 First 1146B2 Power Distribution 2 Second 1146B2 Power Distribution S Unit 5 1145B2 Power Unit 3 T Cable H600 347 G7 Install the Wall Mounting Plates The top plate is used for mounting the back up battery The bottom plate is used to mount the power supply and distribution units The plates can be rack mounted using standard rack mounting brackets See 1145B2 1146B2 Mounting Arrangement on page 281 1 Locate one plate directly below the other one such that the AC power cord 6 5 feet 2 meters reaches the electrical outlet from a power supply mounted on the bottom plate Both plates should be located so the raised letters are right side up October 2002 283 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies gt NOTE A maximum of four power supplies can be powered from one dedicated 110 volts AC 20 amperes or 230 volts AC 15 amperes feeder Use only nonswitched outlets outlets not connected to a wall switch 2 Secure the wall mounting plates to a standard 3 4 inch 2 centimeters thick plywood mounting board Each mounting plate comes with four 10 x 1 2 inch wood screws 3 The 1145B2 Power Supply is snap fit onto the bottom wall mounting plate without tools 4 Aninstaller provided insulated ground wire 16 AWG 12 1 2 square millimeters or greate
18. on page 148 shows a typical Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway installation using 110A type terminal blocks and Typical 110P Type Terminal Blocks MCC on page 149 shows a typical Avaya MCCI Media Gateway installation using 900 pair 110P type terminal blocks Typical 110A Type Terminal Blocks SCC SS Jd SS AS X S A mS NSS X AAAA SS SS PZ Z SSS SS SSS IS d SS i l 3 h f A E I i S ll D 1758534 CJL 042996 Figure notes 1 Avaya SCCI Media Gateways 4 Station Cables mee 5 Station Distribution Field 2 Z113A Cable Slack Manager 6 Port Distribution Field 3 25 Pair Cable to Media Gateway 7 Trunk Auxiliary Field October 2002 149 Main Distribution Frame Typical 110P Type Terminal Blocks MCC mccmd KLC 060596 APS Li Figure notes Station Distribution Field 5 6 7 Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Z113A Cable Slack Manager 25 1 Port Distribution Field Trunk Auxiliary Field 2 3 4 Pair Cable to Media Gateway Station Cables October 2002 150 Main Distribution Frame Labels Main Distribution Frame Labels Label Graphic Symbols and Nomenclature on page 150 shows the graphic symbols used on labels for the S8700 Multi Connect configuration
19. 303 external ringing 276 IP Media Processor 223 LSP 139 telephone power supplies procedures 278 TN799DP C LAN 217 installing auxiliary cabinet 67 installing auxiliary cabinet equipment 68 installing cable slack manager 187 installing cables 153 installing cables between auxiliary cabinet and MDF 181 installing cables between cabinet and MDF 181 installing coupled bonding conductor wires 86 installing earthquake protection MCC 68 69 installing earthquake protection SCC 103 installing EPN cabinet 103 installing fiber optic cable 95 critical reliability CSS system 97 high reliability CSS system 96 standard reliability CSS system 95 J J58890CE 2 power distribution unit 80 J58890CG DC power distribution unit 110 J58890H port cabinet 103 J58890L control cabinet 103 J58890N expansion control cabinet 103 J58890R DC power cabinet 106 110 117 jumper fields port cabinet 121 jumper wires connecting trunk pairs 179 jumpers installing and administering 175 L labels on power supply warning 101 labels control carrier cable 177 labels equipment room cabling 153 labels MDF 150 LAN connecting to 215 large battery holdover 78 launching ASA 58 lead designations port circuit packs and telephones 244 251 October 2002 LEDs alarms 318 attendant consoles 322 Cajun P333T Ethernet switch 321 circuit packs 326 DS1 converter circuit packs 327 IPSI 323 power distribution un
20. Check the status of the SHOCKWATCH and or TILTWATCH indicators on the cardboard container If the container has been jarred or tilted beyond specifications the indicators are red indicating possible damage Remove all packing material Remove front door and rear screw on panels from the cabinet Inspect the cabinet for damage Report any damage per local instructions Install and Position Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet Check the location of the AC power receptacle The receptacle must be on a separately fused circuit that is not controlled by a wall switch It must be located within 10 ft 3 m of the cabinet and should be located outside the MDF area 1 2 Position the clock cabinet in the designated location If earthquake protection is required skip to Install Earthquake Protection for Avaya SCCI Media Gateway on page 103 or Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway on page 68 If earthquake protection is not required level the cabinets and adjust and lock the cabinet stabilizing bolts to keep the cabinet from moving Connect AC Power to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet The clock cabinet requires a 120 VAC 15 amp receptacle The green wire ground provided by the receptacle is sufficient The clock cabinet does not require a ground connection back to the single point ground October 2002 130 Install the Stratum 3 clock Check and Connect Commercial AC Power Before powering up the 8700 Multi Connect con
21. October 2002 318 Testing the Complete Configuration 2 Type3inthe stratum field 3 Type the port network number where the TN780 Tone Clock circuit packs reside in the port network field gt NOTE Wait 1 minute for the software to reconfigure the media server synchronization 4 Verify the results of test 649 If test 649 fails with a code of 2101 then check the wiring for EXTSYNO and EXTSYNI Refer to the maintenance book for your configuration If test 649 is successful then the media server is getting correct timing from the Stratum 3 clock Resolve Alarms As a last step inspect the alarms log Use the media server Web interface 1 Click on View Current Alarms and see if any alarms were generated If so resolve any alarms that may exist using the maintenance book for your configuration LED Indicators Refer to the maintenance book for your configuration for detailed alarm and LED descriptions If a maintenance object begins to fail some periodic tests the media server will generate an alarm The media server identifies 3 levels of alarms Major Alarms Failures that cause critical degradation of service and require immediate attention Minor Alarms Failures that cause some degradation of service but do not cause a critical portion of the configuration to be inoperable This condition requires action but its consequences are not immediate Problems might be impaired service to a few trunks or station
22. Part of Satellite Location 4 Pair Circuits B25A Cable October 2002 169 Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room 3 Pair to 4 Pair Circuit Distribution and Connectivity Figure notes 1 o a Ff WO N Part of Main Distribution Frame MDF 3 Pair Connecting Blocks Purple Field Blue Field Patch Cord or Cross Connect Jumpers To Media Gateway 3 Pair Modularity 10 11 t AAAAAA 1758533a CJL 031196 B25A Cable 3 Pair Circuits 356A Adapter Information Outlet 3 Pair Circuit in 4 Pair Wire DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire October 2002 170 Voice and Data Terminals Voice and Data Terminals e Administration Terminals on page 172 These voice and data terminals can connect to the 8700 Multi Connect configuration Voice and Data Terminals Type Multi button Electronic Telephone MET sets 10 20 30 Button Analog 500 2500 2554 2500 DMGC 2500YMGK 82034 Speakerphone 71XXX series 7101A 7102A 7103A 7104A 73XXX series 7302H 7303H 7303S 7305S 7305H AX XD series 7401D 7403D 7404D 7405D 7406D 7407D 7410D 7434D 7444 81XX series 8102 8110 9 XX series 9101 9103 9110 84XX series 8403B 8405B D B D 8410B D 8411B D 8412 8434 8435 94XX series 9403 9410 9434 Basic Rate Interface BRI 75XX series 7505 VOM T 7506 VOM T 7507 VOM T 85XX series 8503 8510 8520 Workstation series B
23. Solution No power to the UPS No power to the Ethernet switch No power to the media server Servers aren t shadowing IPSI LEDs flash Make sure the UPS is plugged into the outlet Make sure the outlet has power Make sure the Ethernet switch is plugged into the UPS or outlet Make sure the UPS or outlet has power Refer to user s guide that comes with the Ethernet switch for other solutions Make sure the media server is plugged into the UPS Make sure the UPS has power Open the door on the front of the media server and push the power button Make sure you are using a crossover cable Make sure fiber optic cable is plugged in correctly RX to TX and TX to RX Make sure it s in the correct slot Tone Clock slot for 8700 Multi Connect slot 2 for S8700 IP Connect Ping IPSI from server Ping server from IPSI connected to top Services port on IPSI Refer to user s guide that comes with UPS for other solutions October 2002 331 332 Troubleshooting an Installation Configuring the Media Server Hardware Problem Solution Can t log into UPS subagent Can t log into Ethernet switch Can t log into media server Can t access the Web interface Can t access MultiVantage software Can t ping out to customer s network Can t ping media server from customer s network Make sure the SNMP Subagent is installed in the UPS Make sure you are connected to th
24. connect to the customers network install phones connect the media gateway to server requires that Avaya Multi Vantage Software be translated and operational Installation of the media gateways You can do this stage in parallel with installing and configuring the server complex The media gateways must be installed and powered up to effectively complete many of the other stages October 2002 22 High level overview of installation process Cable the Media Gateways This stage is the physical cabling of the media gateways to wall field and patch panels This stage generally follows installing the media gateways and is a prerequisite to installing traditional telephones Connect the media gateway to the server complex This stage connects the media gateways to the server complex via Ethernet cables IP Server Interface IPSI circuit packs are programmed during this stage This stage depends on the server complex being operational Connect to the customer s LAN You can do this stage anytime but to allow testing along the way it should come after the media gateways are cabled and connected to the media server complex Install and wire telephones This stage in most cases requires that the configuration be operational and responsive so you can test the phones as they are wired and placed Of course there may be variations IP telephones that are connected to the customer s network could be placed well before completing the inst
25. gt z Q O gt 7 amp dig_tie RBP 040596 Figure notes 1 External Trunk 4 LO Balanced Output Pair 2 Digital Trunk Circuit Pack Position 1C06 5 LI 3 LO 6 LI Balanced Input Pair DS1 Tie Trunk Example Digital Signal Level 1 DS1 tie trunks provide a 1 544 Mbps T1 or 2 048 Mbps E1 digital data service between two collocated configurations or between the configuration and a data network See these examples e Collocated DS1 Tie Trunks on page 246 e DS1 Tie Trunks Using T1 Channel Service Unit on page 246 For cable descriptions see e DS1 Cables on page 248 e Pinout of C6F Cable on page 248 Collocated DS1 Tie Trunks Two DS1 tie trunk circuit packs can be in collocated configurations A DS1 Tie Trunk circuit pack in one configuration can be connected to a DS1 in another configuration A C6D cable can be used if the distance is less than 50 feet 15 2 m If the distance is between 50 feet 15 meters and 1310 feet 399 meters use a C6E cable gt NOTE The maximum distance between cabinets is 1310 feet 399 meters DS1 Tie Trunks Using T1 Channel Service Unit The T1 Channel Service Unit CSU interfaces the DS1 tie trunks with the 1 544 megabits per second digital facility October 2002 247 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connect the DS1 tie trunk to a T1 CSU See Typical Connections to Channel Service Unit on page 247 gt NOTE A 3150 CSU is sho
26. 58 4 cm above the floor See 110P Type Terminal Blocks 900 Pair on page 185 To mount the first trunk auxiliary field terminal block partially install 2 3 4 in 12 wood screws 7 11 16 in 19 5 cm apart on the left side of the horizontal line on the wall Slide the bottom terminal block ft onto the mounting screws and mark the upper mounting screw locations Remove the terminal block and partially install the upper mounting screws Place the terminal block on the mounting screws and tighten the screws If installing a vertical patch cord trough partially install the first screw for the patch cord trough on the line 7 8 in 2 2 cm to the right of the previous screw Partially install the second mounting screw 5 31 in 13 5 cm to the right of the screw just installed Repeat Steps 4 5 and 6 If another trunk auxiliary field terminal block is to be installed partially install the first screw for the terminal block on the line 7 8 in 2 2 cm to the right of the previous screw Partially install the second mounting screw 7 11 16 in 19 5 cm to the right of the screw just installed Repeat Steps 4 5 and 6 If a horizontal patch cord trough is to be installed install it on the line between the trunk auxiliary field and the distribution field To install the first distribution field terminal block partially install 2 3 4 in 12 wood screws 7 11 16 in 19 5 cm apart on the line to the right of the vertical
27. 60 kilograms Use caution to avoid injury October 2002 102 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack 1 Unpack the media gateways from the shipping material and inspect for damage 2 Openand remove the front door and rear panels from the media gateway 3 Verify the label near the circuit breaker on the power supply toward the rear of each media gateway corresponds to the local voltage type DANGER If the label is different than the voltage type at the site notify your Avaya representative immediately for a replacement power supply Do not under any circumstances connect an incorrect power supply to a power source Check Circuit Packs 1 Ensure all circuit packs are fully inserted into the proper slots according to the Customer Service Document CSD Report any discrepancies in circuit pack type or quantity to your Lucent Technologies representative For detailed circuit pack descriptions refer to Designing the Avaya S8700 Media Gateway for Multi Connect Configuration 2 Check the S8700 Multi Connect configuration adjuncts for damage and report all damage according to local shipping instructions 1 Red tag all defective and over shipped equipment and return to the nearest Material Stocking Location MSL For Avaya Order Exception in the United States call 1 800 772 5409 For international customers contact your order service agent 2 Direct all short shipped reports to the nearest MSL Contact the appropriate
28. Alarm Inputs at AUX Connector on page 257 2 Connect an external alarm output through pins 48 and 23 of the AUX connector See Alarm Output at AUX Connector on page 257 3 Note which device connects to which alarm and give this information to your Avaya representative for troubleshooting purposes 4 Connect emergency transfer power and auxiliary power as shown in Emergency Transfer and Auxiliary Power on page 258 Auxiliary power includes power to an attendant console or adjunct device Alarm Inputs at AUX Connector Color AUX Connector White Blue AP1 Pin 26 Major Alarm Input Blue White Ground Pin 1 White Orange AP2 Pin 27 Minor Alarm Input Orange White Ground Pin 2 Alarm Output at AUX Connector Color AUX Connector Violet Green EXTALMA Pin 48 Alarm Output Green Violet EXTALMB Pin 23 Ground Alarm Output October 2002 258 Installing and Wiring Telephones Emergency Transfer and Auxiliary Power Color AUX Connector Black Green XFERAS8 Emergency Transfer Pin 36 Green Black Ground Pin 11 Black Slate ACC48A Adjunct 48 VDC Pin 19 Slate Black Ground Pin 44 Connect Power Distribution Unit External Alarm Wires The external alarm plug should already be connected to the J58890CH 1 Power Distribution Unit The pinout for the connector is shown in External Alarm Connector Pinout on page 259 gt NOTE RS232 alarms RXD DTR DSR TXD RS 232 GRD and
29. October 2002 82 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet 48 V RTN PN e 48 V 48 V RTN PN 1 48 V 48 V RTN PN n e 48 V a 6 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG pcdfacdi KLC 031202 Install Rectifier Modules and Battery Interface Unit Each rectifier module operates as an integral part of a complete power system with battery backup The modules operate in a redundant high reliability mode to provide 48 VDC at 850 W to a common power bus The Battery Interface Unit controls the rectifier modules manages the batteries and reports the status of system power The unit provides the Remote Power Off RPO option and battery alarm interfaces for internal and external alarms 1 Install the BU3200A Battery Interface Unit comcode 107781502 in the first slot of the power distribution unit See Rectifier Module Installation on page 83 gt NOTE The Battery Interface Unit and the rectifier modules are keyed and can only install 1 way October 2002 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 2 Install the first 2 RMO850HA100 Rectifier Modules comcode 107793796 into the second and third slots of the power distribution unit If 2 to 3 carriers are installed in the system
30. Set the Ringer Frequency on page 119 e Connect the Power Cord into the Power Receptacle on page 119 Connect AC Power Ground 1 Measure and cut a length of 6 AWG 40 4 mm wire long enough to reach between the media gateway stack single point ground block and the approved ground See Typical AC Power and Ground Layout Rear on page 118 2 Atthe lower left rear of the expansion control media gateway A connect the 6 AWG 40 4 mm ground wire to the media gateway stack single point ground block 3 Run the ground wire to the approved ground and attach securely 4 RepeatSteps 1 3 for each expansion control media gateway A gt NOTE If the media gateway stacks are remotely located in a separate room or building run the 6 AWG 40 4 mm media gateway ground wire to an approved protective ground 5 At expansion control media gateway A connect a 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire to the single point ground block The 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire must be long enough to reach the telecommunications cables at the rear of the media gateways to follow these cables to the Main Distribution Frame MDF and to terminate at the Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC The Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC wires are installed and terminated in Cabling Media Gateways on page 141 October 2002 118 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Typical AC Power and Ground Layout Rear
31. stub on the other end Use this cable to connect the DS1 tie trunk circuit pack to channel multiplexers requiring hardwired connections Pinout of C6F Cable Wire Color Lead Designation dem White Green LI High Side 47 Green LI po White Brown LO 48 Brown LO High Side 23 White Slate LBACK2 49 Slate LBACKI 24 October 2002 249 Installing and Wiring Telephones Auxiliary Connector Outputs MCC1 and SCC1 media gateways only Connect a 25 pair cable from the AUX connector on the back of the expansion control carrier to a connecting block on the trunk auxiliary field Auxiliary Lead Appearances at AUX Connector on page 250 shows the Control Carrier outputs cable pinouts The Control Carrier AUX connector outputs include Seven 48 VDC power sources for emergency transfer units Three 48 VDC power sources for remotely powering three attendant consoles or telephone adjuncts Arelay contact that actuates a customer supplied light bell or similar device The relay can activate when a major minor or warning condition occurs The device connected to the alarm leads must not exceed a rating of 30 volts AC rms or 60 volts DC at 0175 amperes Auxiliary Lead Appearances at AUX Connector on page 250 shows the pinouts for an external alarm Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations on page 244 provides port circuit pack and telephone pin designations October 2002 250
32. 2002 205 Connect the Hardware SSE SAS SS Ss SS SESS SHOES B bh S SSss SSO amp SS SS cadsrib5 KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Media Gateway B 3 Ground plate covering TDM cable opening Note e TE All cables running between or exiting media gateways use the opening provided for TDM cables Program the IPSI circuit packs IP server interface circuit packs get IP addresses in one of two ways Using dynamic host configuration protocol DHCP most common Using static IP addressing less common The IPSI circuit packs associated with the 8700 Media Server for Multi connect configurations use the DHCP method In rare cases the 8700 Multi connect IPSIs may use the static addressing method October 2002 206 Connect the Hardware IPSI circuit packs associated with the 8700 Media Server for IP connect configurations always use the static addressing method gt NOTE Before beginning read this procedure to familiarize yourself with it With DHCP addressing there are certain sequences that need to be completed prior to a predetermined time out interval A CAUTION When reusing TN2312 circuit packs that have previously had a static address programmed you must erase the existing IP address Failure to do this may result in serious network problems for the customer Use the following procedure to erase an existing IP address assignment e Plug the TN2312 into a tone clock slot or reseat it
33. 2002 261 Installing and Wiring Telephones 3 Connectan A25D cable between the sneak fuse panel and the terminal block connector associated with the green row in the previous step 4 Install a green label on the terminal block to identify the remote location 5 Administer per the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software Off Premises or Out of Building Stations Out of building campus stations are telephones not physically located in the same building as the equipment room but located on the same property Only analog telephones connected to TN746B TN769 or TN2183 Analog Line circuit packs can be installed out of building Off Premises Connections Connections for 1 to 8 Out of Building Analog Telephones on page 262 shows the connections for 1 to 8 off premises analog telephones Connections to 24 Out of Building Telephones on page 263 shows the connections for up to 24 off premises analog telephones Concentrations of analog line pairs are used at both buildings to minimize the off premises wiring required At the MDF jumpers must be connected between 1 row connecting block in the white field and up to 3 rows connecting blocks in the purple field At the station location a WP 90929 List 1 Concentrator Cable is used There are 8 station appearances on each of the 3 fingers of the concentrator cable The maximum distance from the media gateway to the out of building telephone is 6000 feet 1829 meters using
34. 206 V verify connectivity to media servers 211 IPSI circuit pack version 211 verify server connection to customer LAN 38 47 voice and data terminals connectable 170 voice terminals exposed environments 264 Ww wall mounting plates 282 wiring 1146B power distribution unit 285 2 wire digital station 243 alarm 243 analog station 243 analog tie trunk 244 battery 283 CO trunk 243 DID trunk 243 digital tie trunk 245 DS1 tie trunks 246 off premises stations 260 procedures 239 telephone connection 241 wiring telephone power supplies procedures 278 Z ZD8AJ adapter 161 October 2002 342 Installing the 8700 Multi Connect Index October 2002
35. 24 AWG 5 0 5 square millimeters wire The maximum range of out of building analog telephones 500 2500 or 7100 types connected to an analog line circuit pack should be such that the maximum loop resistance does not exceed 1300 ohms October 2002 262 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connections for 1 to 8 Out of Building Analog Telephones Figure notes kb OO N Locally Engineered Cables and Equipment Out of Building Wiring 25 Pair Connector Multi Pair Protector Units Primary Protectors with Heat Coils or Equivalent with Sneak Current Protection 356A Adapter B25A Cable Male to Female Out Of Building Analog Telephones 10 11 12 13 14 15 crdfobt CJL 101396 Part of Main Distribution Frame MDF Station Side Media Gateway Side White Field Purple Field Cross Connect Jumpers Tip and Ring Wires To Analog Line Circuit Pack October 2002 263 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connections to 24 Out of Building Telephones pices Figure notes 1 Locally Engineered Cables and 8 Equipment 2 25 Pair Connector 3 Multi Pair Protector Units Primary 10 Protectors with Heat Coils or 11 Equivalent with Sneak Current Protection 12 4 B25A Cable Male to Female 13 5 Concentrator Cable WP90929 List 1 14 6 356A Adapter 15 7 Out of Building Wiring o crd 2
36. 310 Test Time Division Multiplexing Bus for Each Port Network 310 Test Expansion Interface Exchange for Each Port Network 88700 Multi Connect only 311 Testing Telephones and Other Equipment Ais Make Test Calls 313 Test 302C Attendant Console 313 Test Selector Console 314 Test External Ringing 314 Test Queue Warning Indicator 314 Test Integrated Announcement 314 Test Music on Hold 315 Test Emergency Transfer 88700 Multi Connect only 315 Test Remote Access Interface 315 Test Terminating Trunk Transmission 316 Test the C LAN Connectivity 316 Test Stratum 3 Clock if used S8700 Multi Connect only 317 Resolve Alarms 318 LED Indicators 318 8700 Media Server LEDs 319 October 2002 Avaya Ethernet Switch LEDs UPS LEDs Telephone Console LEDS IP Server Interface LEDs Circuit Pack LEDs DS1 Converter Circuit Pack LEDs Troubleshooting an Installation Installing the Media Server Hardware Configuring the Media Server Hardware Installing the License and Avaya Authentication Files Index October 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 321 321 322 323 326 327 331 331 332 333 335 Contents 15 16 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Contents October 2002 Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server with Avaya MCC1 or SCC1 Media Gateways 17 Installing the Avaya S
37. 64 voice channels depending on the codecs used gt NOTE The P board suffix designation means the circuit pack is firmware downloadable Click the Upgrading tab above and go to Upgrade Selected Port Circuit Pack Firmware for more information For information on TN802B IP Trunking refer to the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 7 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets The following sections describe the process e Check your shipment on page 222 Install a TN2302AP IP Media Processor on page 223 e Install the cables on page 223 e Install the circuit packs on page 224 e Administer the IP Media Processor on page 225 e Test the External Connection to the LAN on page 227 For further administration refer to the Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software Check your shipment When the order arrives at your site check the contents see Required Hardware on page 223 1 Inspect the shipping carton for damage before opening it If the box is damaged do not open it Inform the shipping company and ask for instructions on filing a claim 2 If the box is undamaged check the contents against the packing slip Check the condition of each component and note any damage or shortages on the packing slip The carton should contain the items in Required Hardware on page 223 for each TN2302AP IP Media
38. ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0203 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0204 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0204 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0205 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0205 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0206 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0206 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0207 ETR PT 42 PASS V press CANCEL to quit press NEXT PAGE to continue D Test License File A CAUTION Wait at least 30 minutes after you install the license before you do the test Check the LIC ERR maintenance object 1 2 Type test license short long and press Enter Verify the screen displays a Test Results screen similar to Sample Test Results screen for test license on page 310 October 2002 310 Testing the Complete Configuration Sample Test Results screen for test license test license UN TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code LIC ERR 1484 PASS A Test Expansion Interface Circuit Packs S8700 Multi Connect only Check each Expansion Interface EI circuit pack in the media gateway 1 Type test board UUCSS where UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot for an Expansion Interface EI circuit pack in the media gateway and press Enter gt NOTE Labels on the port network and carrier and on the strip under the circuit pack contain this information 2 Verify the screen displays test results similar to Sample Test Results for Expansion Interface Board 2A401 588700 Multi Connect This example is for board 2201 3
39. Ethernet switch cables to IPSI circuit packs on page 193 Connect Avaya SCC1 media gateway IPSI and maintenance circuit pack ribbon cables on page 199 Program the IPSI circuit packs on page 205 e Using DHCP addressing on page 206 e Using static addressing on page 208 Verify connectivity to the media servers on page 211 e Avaya MCCI Media Gateway on page 193 e Avaya SCCI Media Gateway on page 193 Verify connectivity to the media servers on page 211 Verify IPSI firmware version on page 211 Enable control of IPserver interfaces on page 212 Connect the USB Modems on page 212 Connect the Ethernet switch cables to IPSI circuit packs Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Refer to Getting Started with the Avaya 5700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations for a connectivity guide Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Refer to Getting Started with the Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configurations wj for a general connectivity guide Use the following detailed steps to connect the Ethernet cables at the SCC1 media gateway 1 If not already removed remove the ground plate Remove the upper and lower rear covers from the media gateway s October 2002 194 Connect the Hardware Sv SS Sm D SS 3 w 7 SSSssszwww SS SS S amp S Y SN Ss SS SSSs SSS SES BSS er SS SS SS _C SS SX SSS
40. Figure notes 1 Rear of Media Gateway 9 Satellite Closet 2 Main Distribution Frame MDF 10 Auxiliary Cabinet Yellow Field 3 Port Distribution Field Purple Field 11 White Field 4 Station Distribution Field White Field 12 Blue Field 5 Trunk Auxiliary Field 13 Cross Connect Jumpers 6 Purple Field 14 103A or Modular Wall Jack 7 Yellow Field 15 4 Pair Line Cord 8 Green Field 16 To Line Circuit Pack October 2002 146 Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware Example MDF Connections Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 4 Port MET Line ZIZIIIZIIIZIIITINSEREERENREEUNEN Port Tie Trunk ZIINIZEIZEITEREUEREENBENREEEN uus ZZZZZIZPIIIIZENENENREEREEUERENE Port Analog ol C08 8 0 2 2 0 2 Port CO To ce ee 2 EIn Port Data Line ETINZINZINTIEZCINZIINZIETCIE Port DID ol C08 08 0 Port Digital rd OY 2 er 2 OF 2 rd rd Oo 2 or 2 Port Hybrid IZIIIIIIZIITIIIIIZIITIIIIIN Port BR ELF ME TT SE Te SE TE TEI Port Analog ZEXEZZENRREIIZXIIZSIIENNEREIIXEINE Port Digital EE ee TE ee Port Analog ELe tie fee eee tox ee EEEa Port Digital ELe CII coc eee or corr eet oe 2 zi EEINEREUBRENRRENREENRRERRENIZNEN widfccf2 EWS 102798 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
41. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on this switch This product can be hazardous if immersed in water To avoid the possibility of electrical shock do not use it near water The Avaya P333T PWR switch and modules contain components sensitive to electrostatic discharge Do not touch the circuit boards unless instructed to do so October 2002 289 290 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies This product should be operated only from the type of AC and optional DC power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of the type of AC power being provided contact a qualified service person Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of line or electric shock e Disconnect the cords on this product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions e If the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed e Tf liquid has been spilled into it e f it has been exposed to rain or water fit was dropped or the housing has been damaged e Ifitexhibits a distinct change in performance If it does not operate normally when following the operating instructions Using the P333T PWR switch The P333T PWR Power over Ethernet Stackable Switch can be used to power 46xx series IP telephones in addition to
42. Host Name active server sg This is server MH Indicate how each ethernet port is to be used You may accept the defaults Ethernet ports may be used for multiple purposes except for the port assigned to the laptop which must be dedicated to only that purpose Physical connections to the Ethernet ports must match these settings 2 em D Ethemet 1 Geta hema here gl Click CONTINUE to proceed Continue Close Window About This Screen October 2002 35 36 Configure Media Server 1 Configure Server Progress Set Server Identities Review Notices Server names must be unique Copy Settings Set Identities Host Name server1 Configure Interfaces Host Name server2 Configure Switches Set DNS DHCP Host Name active server Set Static Routes This is server 1 Configure Time Server Seb Moen MURUS Indicate how each ethernet port is to be used You may accept the Update System defaults Ethernet ports may be used for multiple purposes except for the port assigned to the laptop which must be dedicated to only that purpose Physical connections to the Ethernet ports must match these settings 1 Control Network A Ethernet 0 Default Ethernet 0 2 Services Port Ethernet 1 Default Ethernet 1 3 Server Duplication Link Ethernet 2 Default Ethernet 2 4 Control Network B Ethernet 3 Default Ethernet 3 5 Corporate LAN Ethernet 4 Default Ethern
43. Ifany result is FAIL check the connections for the fiber optic link 4 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each Expansion Interface circuit pack Sample Test Results for Expansion Interface Board 2A01 S8700 Multi Connect K TEST RESULTS N Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 02A01 EXP INTF 237 PASS 02A01 EXP INTF 238 PASS 02A01 EXP INTF 240 PASS 02A01 EXP INTF 241 PASS 02A01 EXP INTF 244 PASS 02A01 EXP INTF 316 PASS M J Test Time Division Multiplexing Bus for Each Port Network Check each TDM bus for each Port Network PN in the configuration October 2002 311 Testing the Complete Configuration 1 Type test tdm port network 1 and press Enter 2 Verify atest results screen similar to Sample Test Results for TDM Bus Port Network 1 is displayed 3 Ifresult is FAIL for any test check the connectors of the TDM bus cables in PN 2 4 Repeatthese steps for each PN to check the TDM bus cables Sample Test Results for TDM Bus Port Network 1 r W test tdm port network 1 UN TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code PN 01A TDM BUS 294 PASS PN 01A TDM BUS 296 PASS PN 01A TDM BUS 297 ABORT 1005 PN 01B TDM BUS 294 PASS PN 01B TDM BUS 296 ABORT 1005 PN 01B TDM BUS 297 PASS Test Expansion Interface Exchange for Each Port Network S8700 Multi Connect only If the configuration is critical reliability test the expansion interface exchan
44. Mixed AC DC Powered Media Gateway on page 90 shows a power and ground layout for a mixed AC DC power cabinet configuration in the same equipment room with the first media gateway being DC powered and the next media gateway being AC powered If a third media gateway is part of the 58700 Multi Connect configuration use the same basic connections October 2002 90 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Typical Power and Ground for a Mixed AC DC Powered Media Gateway 9 cydfacdi KLC 031202 Figure notes 1 DC power supply Ground Discharge Bar Approved Ground 1 AWG up to 50 feet 15 2m or engineered for less than 0 5 volt drop per conductor To Coupled Bonding Conductor terminal block at Main Distribution Frame Coupled Bonding Conductor Media Gateway ground block AC power distribution unit O ON Oo oO F WO I AC power cord e AC power source Connect Remote Power Off Cable Remote Power Off Cable Connections Part 1 on page 92 shows the location of the Remote Power Off RPO cable The opposite end of the cable connects to the Emergency Power Off EPO switch located outside of the equipment room Even though the equipment room EPO switch disconnects main AC power to the equipment room it cannot disconnect the battery power from the J58890CH An auxiliary set of contacts inside the EPO are
45. PWR switch Important Safety Instructions 289 Using the P333T PWR switch 290 Connect the P333T PWR switch 291 Completing the Installation Administration 293 Verify translations 293 View alarms 293 Upgrade the IPSI firmware if necessary 294 Enable and disable Ethernet switch ports 294 Back up the media server to PCMCIA flashcard 295 Release busied out media server 296 View alarms 296 Add INADS phone numbers 297 Enable alarms to INADS via modem 297 Enable alarms to INADS via SNMP 297 Register the system 298 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server 299 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Directly 299 Media Server Web Interface 300 October 2002 14 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Contents Avaya Site Administration 301 Command Line Interface 301 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Remotely over the Network 301 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Remotely over a Modem 302 Setting up a dial up connection 302 Dialing up to the media server 302 Finding the active media server IP address 303 Installing Avaya Site Administration 303 From the Avaya Site Administration CD 304 From the S8700 Media Server 304 Testing the Complete Configuration 306 Testing Port Network Equipment 307 Check Port Network Status for Each Media Gateway 307 Check Circuit Pack Configuration 308 Test Media Server Interchange 308 Test the IPSI Circuit Pack 309 Test License File 309 Test Expansion Interface Circuit Packs 88700 Multi Connect only
46. Processor ordered 3 Read and follow any directions inserted into the package by the factory October 2002 223 Connecting to the Customer s Network Required Hardware Comcode Code Description Quantity 108312612 TN2302AP IP Media Processor MedPro lor more 848525887 TN2302AP Amphenol Adapter 1 MedPro The adapter has an amphenol connector on one side and an RJ45 connector on the other for connecting to the network See TN2302AP Amphenol Adapter on page 224 gt NOTE The customer must provide one CATS or better cable for each TN2302AP Install a TN2302AP IP Media Processor The TN2302AP consumes 16 watts of power and the power budget is 15 watts per slot Do not fill every available slot in a given media gateway G600 or SCC1 or carrier MCC1 with them Use the following guidelines e MCCI 18 per carrier e SCCI 16 per media gateway e G600 5 per media gateway Have the following equipment on site before your shipment arrives e An unoccupied port slot in the media gateway for each TN2302AP IP Media Processor A 10 BaseT or 10 100 BaseT Ethernet connection into your local area network LAN Oneor more valid unused IP addresses on the network that can be assigned to the IP Media Processor server You also need the subnet mask and default gateway gt NOTE Get this information from the network administrator or refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Form 88700 Medi
47. about e Information Outlet Locations on page 173 e Site Satellite and Adapter Locations on page 173 e Sizing 4 Pair Station Cables on page 173 e Sizing 25 Pair and Multiple 25 Pair Station Cables on page 173 e 3 Pair Station Cable Circuits on page 174 e 4 Pair Station Cable Circuits on page 174 Information Outlet Locations The customer or marketing representative must provide floor plans showing the information outlet locations and types flush or surface mounted required The floor plans must also show a complete overview of all conduit and cabling facilities in the building Site Satellite and Adapter Locations Use the following information when determining site satellite or adapter locations Keep the number of locations to a minimum To minimize the station wiring distances centrally locate the sites satellites or adapters among the information outlets e Site satellite locations must be easily accessible and contain AC powered receptacles One 258A BR2580A adapter is required for each 25 pair station cable containing 4 pair station circuits One 356A adapter is required for each 25 pair station cable containing 3 pair station circuits Hardware requirements are the same as for the equipment room Sizing 4 Pair Station Cables Use the scale of the floor plan to determine the approximate length of the station cables required per the standard SYSTIMA
48. attendant testing 313 selector testing 314 control carrier cable labels 177 control carrier outputs cable 177 249 control carrier outputs cable installing 154 copying to media server Avaya authentication file 37 license file 37 coupled bonding conductor 73 117 191 coupled bonding conductor wires installing 86 coupled bonding connector 158 critical reliability testing systems 311 critical reliability systems cabling 127 customer network connecting to 215 D damage reporting 65 66 101 data link protector installing 265 DC distribution unit connecting to DC power cabinet 108 DC power 81 86 130 131 battery interface module installing 82 connecting battery and power cabinet grounds 86 connecting battery cabinet to power cabinet 89 connecting cabinets 88 connecting distribution unit to power cabinet 108 connecting ground wires 87 rectifier module installing 82 DC power cabinet 87 approved ground 86 connecting SCC ground 109 DC power connections 110 DC power connecting cabinet grounds 106 DC power receptacle location 103 DC AC mixed ground and power 89 DHCP addressing IPSI circuit pack 205 DHCP IP addressing using 206 DID trunk wiring 243 digital line circuit protectors 264 digital tie trunk wiring 245 direct access to media server 299 direct connect systems 94 direct department calling testing queue warning indicator 314 disable unused Ethernet switch ports 294 do
49. damaged do not open it Inform the shipping company and ask for instructions on filing a claim 2 If the box is undamaged check the contents against the packing slip Check the condition of each component and note any damage or shortages on the packing slip The carton should contain the items in Required Hardware on page 217 for each TN799DP C LAN circuit pack ordered 3 Read and follow any directions inserted into the package by the factory Required Hardware Comcode Code Description Quantity 108525528 TN799DP Control LAN circuit pack 1 or more 102631413 ADPTR 259A Adapter 1 C LAN The adapter has an amphenol connector on one side and an RJ45 connector on the other for connecting to the network Install a TN799DP C LAN Have the following equipment on site e An unoccupied port slot for the TN799DP A 10 BaseT Ethernet connection into your LAN for the TN799DP One or more valid unused IP addresses on the network one for each TN799DP C LAN that can be assigned to the C LAN circuit pack You also need the subnet mask and default gateway gt NOTE Get this information from the network administrator or refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S8 amp 700 Media Server e A 259A adapter for each TN799DP A CAT3 or CATS cable with a DW8 connector on each end Install the cables 1 Determine into which port slots you are putting the TN799DP C LAN circuit packs
50. following table Manufacturer s Port FIC Code SOC REN Network Identifier A S Code Jacks Off On premises station OL13C 9 0F RJ2GX RJ21X RJLIC DID trunk 02RV2 T 0 0B RJ2GX RJ21X CO trunk 02GS2 0 3A RJ21X CO trunk 02LS2 0 3A RJ21X Tie trunk TL31M 9 0F RJ2GX Basic Rate Interface 02IS5 6 0F 6 0Y RJA9C 1 544 digital interface 04DU9 BN 6 0F RJ48C 1KN 1SN RJ48M 120A2 channel service unit 04DU9 DN 6 0Y RJ48C If the terminal equipment for example the MultiVantage Solution equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone com pany will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of ser vice may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equip ment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment for repair or warranty information please contact the Technical Service Center at 1 800 242 2121 or contact your local Avaya representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that
51. for Basic Rate Interface BRI and certain display sets The Port Assignment Record must have this information e Station or trunk type or feature service Building location floor room desk outlet Extension number or trunk group and member number e Port circuit location on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration for each endpoint media gateway carrier slot circuit Route from equipment room through equipment closets to each endpoint Auxiliary power supply if required October 2002 144 Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware SYSTIMAX 110 type hardware is used for the Main Distribution Frame MDF 110 type hardware is available in two basic types the 110A and 110P The 110A requires less wall space than the 110P The 110P includes horizontal and vertical cable troughs for managing cross connect cables The S8700 Multi Connect configuration is connected to the MDF with the supplied B25A male to female 25 pair cables The cables are provided in 10 foot 3 m and 15 foot 4 5 m lengths Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Main Distribution Field Design 555 230 630 for more information Example MDF Connections Avaya SCC Media Gateway on page 145 shows a detailed example of the SCC1 media gateway cables connecting media gateways and satellite closets to the Main Distribution Frame MDF The figure shows the cross connections for one example station c
52. in 30 5 cm spacing is maintained between the CBC and other power and ground leads 3 Tie wrap the ground wire to the inside wiring cable gt NOTE The ground wires are connected to the CBC as instructed in Cabling Media Gateways on page 141 Connect Grounds for DC Battery and Power Cabinets gt NOTE The wire in the next step must be sized for a maximum voltage drop of 0 5 VDC in each leg of the DC distribution In this example 1 AWG is used 1 Measure and cut a minimum of a 1 AWG 70 44 mm wire long enough to reach between the ground connection terminal in the DC Battery cabinet and the Ground Discharge Bar in the DC Power cabinet See Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet on page 82 2 Crimp terminal lugs on each end of the wire Terminal lugs are furnished as part of D 181895 Kit of Parts Comcode 105434559 3 Atthe DC power cabinet connect the wire to the Ground Discharge Bar 4 Route the wire through one of the holes in the side of the cabinets and terminate it on the Ground Connection Terminal in the DC battery cabinet Connect DC Power cabinet Approved Ground gt NOTE The wire must be at least as large as the largest distribution wire in the S8700 Multi Connect configuration required by UL In this example 1 AWG is used 1 Atthe DC power cabinet connect a 1 AWG 70 44 mm ground wire to the Ground Discharge Bar See Typical Power and Ground for a DC powe
53. inches 15 centimeters of the floor Connect the 1151A1 or 1151A2 Power Supplies The 1151A1 is a standard no battery backup power supply unit The 1151A2 is a battery backup version of the 1151A1 Either power supply can support one telephone with or without an adjunct The maximum loop range is 250 feet 76 meters Two modular jacks are used Power is provided on the PHONE jack pins 7 and 8 and respectively The PHONE and LINE jacks are 8 pin female nonkeyed 657 type jacks that can accept D4 D6 and D8 modular plug cables See an 1151A1 2 Power Supply Front on page 289 October 2002 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies 1151A1 2 Power Supply Front pwr_sup1 CJL 051496 P333T PWR Power over Ethernet Stackable Switch The P333T PWR power supply complies with the Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL standard UL 1950 second edition Complies UL 1950 Approved C22 2 No 950 Std Approved CE For safety instructions see P333T PWR switch Important Safety Instructions on page 289 For installation instructions see Connect the P333T PWR switch on page 291 P333T PWR switch Important Safety Instructions Please read the following helpful tips Retain these tips for later use When using this switch the following safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons Read and understand all instructions
54. location for specific instructions October 2002 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Position the Media Gateway Stacks A CAUTION Lifting the media gateway may require 2 people as it may weigh as much as 130 pounds 60 kilograms Use caution to avoid injury Before beginning the media gateway installation check the location of the AC DC power receptacles The receptacles must be on separately fused circuits not controlled by wall switches They must be located within 10 feet 3 meters of the media gateway and outside the Main Distribution Frame MDF area Refer to the serial numbers and lettered designation strips in the Customer Service Document CSD when stacking the media gateways If earthquake protection is required skip to Install Earthquake Protection for Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway on page 103 Return to this section when finished Perform this step first for all standard reliability media gateway stack installations 1 Install the media gateway stack Place expansion control media gateway A J58890N on the floor in the position determined when the room layout was planned Set port media gateway B J58890H on top of expansion control media gateway A Set port media gateway C J58890H on top of port media gateway B Set port media gateway D J58890H on top of port media gateway C 2 Install 2 through 44 media gateway stacks using the instructions in step 1 Install Earthquake Protec
55. network interface to the sneak fuse panel Also 157B connecting blocks equipped with SCP 110 protectors can be used for sneak current protection Sneak Fuse Panel Ordering Information Description Comcode 157B Connecting Block 403613003 SCP 110 Protector 406948976 507B Sneak Current Fuse Panel 107435091 220029 Sneak Current Fuse 407216316 gt NOTE Sneak current protectors with a rating of 350 mA at 600 volts must be Underwriter s Laboratory UL listed for domestic installation and Canadian Standards Association CS A certified for Canadian installation The 507B includes 52 sneak fuses and two cables and can be ordered using PEC code 63210 The SCP 110 protectors are used with 110 type hardware and on the 507B Sneak Fuse Panel The SCP 110 Protectors can be ordered separately and installed on the 157B connecting block Fifty protectors are required per block October 2002 153 Cable Installation Cable Installation gt NOTE To route the cables from the rear of the SCC stack or MCC to the MDF use the Install Cable Slack Managers on page 187 procedure Also see Cable Slack Manager on page 159 This section has information about e Equipment Room Cabling Labels on page 153 e Cable Routing Guidelines on page 154 e Control Carrier Outputs Cable Installation on page 154 e Connect Expansion Control Carrier Outputs Cable on page 177 e Trunk Cab
56. next to each connector Also mark the Unit Number and Connectivity information on the label Typical Wiring to a Telephone 77 9 Figure notes 1 Power Supply Kit 9 Modular Cord 2 2 5 5 0 or 8 0 Amp Hour Battery 10 Pins 7 and 8 Display Terminal 3 1146B2 Distribution Unit Power 4 1145B2 Power Supply WP Anpa 5 Circuits 1 16 12 Installer Provided Ground Wire 6 Circuits 17 32 13 ISDN Display System Protocol Terminal 2 Ee 14 Circuits 1 32 8 Main Distribution Frame Reset LEDs on Power Distribution Unit A red LED next to any of the 32 power output connectors indicates a short circuit in the building wiring or the terminal equipment To reset the LED October 2002 287 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Disconnect the terminal equipment from the wall jack If the LED goes off the terminal equipment is faulty and must be replaced If the LED is still lit find and repair the short circuit in the building wiring Reconnect the terminal equipment to the wall jack and retest terminal equipment operation 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies The 1151A1 and 1151A2 power supplies comply with the Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL Standard UL 1950 second edition Complies UL 1950 Certified CSA 22 2 Approved EN6950 Approved CE For safety instructions see Important Safety Instructions for 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies on pa
57. off October 2002 28 Configure Media Server 1 Connect and log into the 88700 media server Web Interface Connect the services laptop computer to the dedicated services port default is port 2 Eth1 on the back of the media servers using the black crossover cable The following administration uses the services laptop computer and the media server Web interface gt NOTE Depending on your laptop computer s operating system generally Windows 95 98 you may need to clear the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache before entering a new IP address If you enter an IP address and your computer cannot connect then you may need to clear the ARP cache 1 On your laptop computer click Start gt Run to open the Run dialog box 2 Type command and press Enter to open a MS DOS Command Line window 3 Typearp d 192 11 13 6 and press Enter to clear the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache in the laptop This command will respond with one of the following The command line prompt when the cache has been cleared The phrase The specified entry was not found This is returned when the specified IP address does not currently contain an entry in the ARP cache 4 Launch the Web browser 5 Type 192 11 13 6 in the Location Netscape or Address Internet Explorer field to bring up the media server Web interface Z about blank Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Bak gt gt Q a Q
58. power cord provided with some telephones The protector is installed on the equipment side of the protection in both buildings Refer to Example Adjunct Power Connections on page 254 and Connections at Trunk Auxiliary Field on page 266 Digital Voice Circuit Protectors Enhanced Primary Protector Circuit Pack With Sneak Current Protection TN754B all vintages 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx TN2181 all vintages 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx TN2224CP all vintages 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx October 2002 266 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connections at Trunk Auxiliary Field 1758482b RBP 062696 Figure notes 1 To Network Interface Facility 3 One Pair of Wires 2 To Control Carrier Auxiliary Connector 4 24 Pair of RJ21X Network Interface Jack Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones An 808A Emergency Transfer Panel mounted next to the trunk auxiliary field provides emergency transfer capability You can use 2500 series analog telephones either for emergency transfer or as normal extensions For emergency transfer connect the phones directly to the 808A for normal extensions wire them through the 808A Analog Central Office CO and Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS trunks can provide emergency transfer capability The 808A Emergency Transfer Panel provides emergency trunk bypass or power fail transfer for up to five incoming Central Office CO trunk loops to five sele
59. power to be removed from the media gateway 1 Ensure the associated circuit breakers at the AC power panel are OFF 2 Have an electrician connect AC power leads to the rectifiers using the instructions provided with the rectifiers in the DC Power cabinet Each rectifier should have its own branch circuit Terminate leads on the AC INPUT terminal block of each rectifier October 2002 115 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Connect Battery Cabinet CAUTION Power is present in the media gateway even if the AC power cable is unplugged Turn off the main circuit breaker on the front of the media gateway when procedures require ALL power to be removed from the media gateway Connect the DC Battery cabinet to the DC Power cabinet DC Battery to DC Power cabinet Connections on page 115 shows how to make typical connections from the DC Battery cabinet to the DC Power cabinet DC Battery to DC Power cabinet Connections a pwrdist5 RBP 052896 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 DC Power cabinet Connect Red DC Power Cable to 48 VDC Return Bus Connect Black DC Power Cable to 48 VDC Bus Inset Applies to 48 VDC Buses and 48 VDC Return Buses Battery cabinet DC Power Cables Red and Black October 2002 116 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Connect Optional Battery Leads To prevent the internal batteries from discharg
60. premises equipment CPE user This equipment returns answer supervision signals on all direct inward dialed DID calls forwarded back to the public switched tele phone network Permissible exceptions are A call is unanswered A busy tone is received A reorder tone is received Avaya attests that this registered equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the
61. provide the ground connection between media gateways provide radio frequency RF radiation protection and help stabilize the media gateways October 2002 125 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Use the front ground plate instead of the media gateway clip to attach the media gateways to each other Use one front ground plate between two stacked media gateways 1 At the front of the media gateways align the holes in the top of the front ground plate with the holes at the bottom of the upper media gateway and insert the four screws Do not tighten the screws yet See Rear Ground Plate and Front Plate or Media Gateway Clip Side View on page 124 2 Atthefront of the media gateways align the holes in the bottom of the front ground plate with the holes at the top of the lower media gateway Insert the four supplied 12 24 x 1 2 inch 1 27 cm thread forming screws Do not tighten the screws yet 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all stacked media gateways are fastened together 4 Tighten all screws securely Rear Ground Plate and Front Plate or Media Gateway Clip Side View grdpltec LJK 031096 Figure notes 1 Front Ground Plate or Media Gateway Clip 2 Battery 3 Rear Ground Plate October 2002 126 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Install Media Gateway Clips Media Gateways without Earthquake Protection A media gateway clip i
62. providing a 10 100 megabits per second Ethernet connection The switch can form part of a stack with the G700 Media Gateway or members of the P330 stackable switching system A CAUTION The Avaya P333T PWR switch does not contain any user serviceable components inside Do not open the case CAUTION The P333T PWR switch can be used only indoors and in a controlled environment The P333T PWR switch has 24 10 100 Base T ports each of which can supply up to 16 5 watts using the internal power supply and operates on a 100 240 volts AC 5 3 amperes 50 60 hertz power source with the option of using the 44 57 volts DC 15 amperes to boost the InLine power The P333T PWR switch can be placed in a wiring closet or on a flat stable surface like a desk Screws are provided for mounting in a standard 19 inch rack October 2002 291 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Connect the P333T PWR switch Power up AC input 1 Insert the power cord into the power connector BUPS or AC Power Supply on the rear of the unit See Connectors on the P333T PWR switch on page 291 Connectors on the P333T PWR switch input N o Vin 44 57V pu amp scdip333 KLC 082002 Figure notes 1 BUPSconnector 2 ACoconnector 2 Insert the other end of the power cord into a nonswitched electrical outlet or the connector on the BUPS The unit powers up and performs a self test proc
63. remote powering are within 250 ft 76 2 m of the equipment room 4 pair station circuits are run from the equipment room to the information outlets If this is not the case or if the customer requires 2 point administration 3 pair station circuits are run from the equipment room to satellite locations Then the 4 pair station circuits are run from the satellite locations to the information outlets This section has information about e 4 Pair Station Circuits on page 165 e 3 Pair to 4 Pair Station Circuit Distribution on page 165 Lists of terminals that can be connected to the 8700 Multi Connect configuration are provided in Voice and Data Terminals on page 170 e Administration Terminals on page 172 4 Pair Station Circuits Four pair circuits can be run directly from an equipment room MDF to a 258A or BR2580A adapter as shown in 4 Pair Circuit Distribution and Connectivity on page 166 The 4 pair station cables connect the adapter to the information outlets The 4 pair station cables can be run directly from the equipment room to the information outlets if 4 pair terminal blocks are used in the distribution field See 4 Pair Run to Equipment Room or Satellite Location on page 167 The station cables must be field terminated on the 110 type terminal blocks If 110 type terminal blocks are used with a modular plug ended station cable an adapter can be connected d
64. server go to the task bar at the bottom right of your PC screen RY ne T O go 1 45 PM 2 Right click on the Network Status icon and select Status then the Details tab 3 Scroll down until you see the Server IP address This is the IP address for the media server you are connected to l Installing Avaya Site Administration If you do not have Avaya Site Administration on your computer make sure your PC or laptop first meets the minimum requirements described in Minimum requirements to run Avaya Site Administration on page 303 Minimum requirements to run Avaya Site Administration Operating systems Processor RAM MS Windows 95 486SL 66 16 MB MS Windows 98 Pentium 32 MB MS Windows NT 4 0 Pentium 64 MB MS Windows 2000 Pentium class 300 MHz 64 MB MS Windows XP ME Pentium class 3 600 MHz 256 MB Graphics adapter SVGA with minimum screen resolution of 800 x 600 Floppy disk drive 3 1 2 in 1 44 MB floppy disk drive CD ROM CD ROM drive required to install Avaya Site Administration from CD Available hard disk space A minimum of 100 MB free hard disk space is required The requirement for disk space depends on the size and number of configuration data sets October 2002 304 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Minimum requirements to run Avaya Site Administration Printer port Network adapter Free serial ports Standard PC or network printer port is required for connecting to a printer to produce
65. server only Acommand line interface in a Telnet or terminal emulation window for Avaya MultiVantage software commands usable on the active media server only Media Server Web Interface You can access the media server Web interface by either connecting directly to the services port on the media server see Services laptop computer connected directly to the media server on page 300 or connecting over the customer s network October 2002 301 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Connected to the services port To use the media server Web interface open either the Netscape or MS Internet Explorer browser In the Location Address field type 192 11 13 6 When prompted log in to administer the S8700 media server and the Avaya MultiVantage software features Connected through the customer network To use the media server Web interface open either the Netscape or MS Internet Explorer browser In the Location Address field type the active server name or IP address When prompted log in to administer the 8700 media server and the Avaya MultiVantage software features You may also connect directly to an individual server using its name or IP address Avaya Site Administration To use Avaya Site Administration open the application and select the configuration you want to access When prompted log in to administer the Avaya MultiVantage software features usable on the active media server only See Installing Avaya Sit
66. services laptop computer connected to the media server and uses the media server Web interface This procedure assumes that the license and authentication file are on the services laptop 1 Under Miscellaneous click Upload Files to Media Server Upload Files to Server This page allows data files to be loaded onto the server from the machine that your browser is running on In one or more of the fields below enter the file name s to be sent to the server File s to Browse upload Browse Po Browse LOAD FILE About This Screen October 2002 38 Configure Media Server 1 2 Click Browse next to the top field to open the File Upload window on your computer Find the license file that you need to upload to the media server Repeat step 2 for the second field to find the Avaya authentication file 4 When all the files to be uploaded show in the fields click Load File to upload all the files to the media server Once the license and Avaya authentication files are uploaded to the media server you must install them Install the license and Avaya authentication files The following administration uses the services laptop computer connected to media server 1 and uses the media server Web interface 1 Under Security click Install License select Install new license then click the Install License button to install the license files Install License C Undo last install Install new license I
67. shows a typical power and ground layout for a DC power system containing a DC power distribution unit DC Power Connections with DC Distribution Unit A 10 foot 3 meter power cord is equipped with the appropriate connectors In the configuration shown in Connections Using DC Power Distribution Unit on page 113 each DC power cabinet stack has a DC Power Distribution Unit associated with it Stacking DC Power Cabinets Up to 3 DC power cabinets can be stacked to supply power to media gateway stacks See DC Power Cabinet Stack Rear on page 114 October 2002 111 112 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Typical DC Power Connections pcd dc2 PDH 101596 Figure notes 1 Media Gateway Stack DC Power Cabinet White Wires Green Ground Wires and Black Wires Connect to the 48 VDC Return Bus 48 VDC Bus Connect White Wires to Circuit Breakers DC Power Cable H600 436 G1 to Power Connector on Each Media Gateway Cut to Length and Crimp a Ring Terminal Onto Each Wire 30 Feet 9 m Maximum Route Cables Through Sliding Door 0o 0 FF WO I foe 10 Circuit Breaker 11 Supplied 10 32 Screw 10 Star Washer and 10 32 Hex Nut 12 Inset Showing DC Power Connector Male October 2002 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Connections Using DC Power Distribution Unit
68. slot on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration cabinet and the Stratum 3 Clock to the cross connect module in the yellow field Connect the CSU plug end of the H 600 274 Y cable to the primary CSU Route an H600 307 cable from the DS1 connector panel slot on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration cabinet to the connector on the S8700 Multi Connect configuration end of the Y cable Route a B25A cable from the CLOCK end of the Y cable to the cross connect module in the yellow field Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the secondary CSU The maximum allowable cabling distance between the Stratum 3 clock and the CSU is shown in Maximum Cabling Distance on page 135 For standard reliability configurations refer to Cross Connects for Standard Reliability on page 136 to cross connect the TN780 and CLOCK end connections to the Stratum 3 Clock connections on the cross connect module For high or critical reliability configurations refer to Cross Connects for High or Critical Reliability on page 137 to cross connect the TN780 and CLOCK end connections to the Stratum 3 Clock connections on the cross connect module The common cross connection from the TN780 in A and B carriers to the Stratum 3 Clock should be done by bridging the jumper wires Dress the cables down sides of the cabinet and run through the Cable Slack Manager if provided Administer per the Administrator s Guide for
69. sneak fuse panels Horizontal wall space must also be provided for emergency transfer units 110 Type Hardware The trunk auxiliary field and the distribution field are mounted on the same wall Each 110P type terminal block is 8 5 inches 21 6 cm wide Vertical patch cord troughs are 5 31 inches 13 4 cm wide and horizontal patch cord troughs are 23 inches 58 4 cm wide Each 110A type terminal block is 10 81 inches 27 4 cm wide however no horizontal patch cord troughs are used and the blocks are shorter than 110P type terminal blocks This allows the 110A type terminal blocks to be stacked Therefore the 1 10A type hardware requires less space than the 110P type hardware on a per station basis Cable Slack Manager A Cable Slack Manager is 32 inches 81 3 cm wide Slack managers are commonly used in installations consisting of media gateway stacks The quantity of slack managers is determined by dividing the total length of the Main Distribution Frame MDF in inches cm by 32 81 3 A partial number of 0 4 or less should be rounded down and a partial number of 0 5 or more should be rounded up for example 2 4 2 Cable Slack Managers and 2 5 3 Cable Slack Managers gt NOTE Cable clamps are required in installations with Cable Slack Managers At the rear of the media gateways on each rear ground plate install two cable clamps using the screws provided These clamps hold the 25 pair input output or Main Distribution Frame
70. the TN799DP Use Avaya Site Administration for the administration gt NOTE The customer or design team provides the actual names IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses Refer to the filled out Job Aid entitled Pre Installation Network Worksheet for them 1 Loginas craft 2 Type list configuration all and press Enter to verify that the Multi Vantage software recognizes the TN799DP circuit packs 3 Type change node names and press Enter 4 On page 2 type in the node names and IP addresses for each TN799DP C LAN circuit pack TER node names ip Page 1 of a IP NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address csriclanl 192 168 1 80 srlclan2 172 106 319 220 traf clan 172 16 19 118 12 of 12 administered node names were displayed Use list node names command to see all the administered node names Use change node names ip xxx to change a node name xxx or add a node name EN p 5 Type display circuit pack and press Enter Verify that the TN799DP shows up in the Code column 6 Type change ip interfaces and press Enter October 2002 220 Connecting to the Customer s Network change Enable Eth Pt BOO Deu Sr Bo gt Bo Se Se Kt Ne ip interfaces Page Iof BY IP INTERFACES Net Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Address Rgn C LAN 05B11 TN799 C sriclan2 255 255 248 172 16 23 254 3 C LAN 01A11 TN799 C traf clan 255 255 248 172 16 23 254
71. to an identically labeled terminal block row at the satellite closet See Example 3 Pair Labeling to Information Outlet on page 176 This is always the case for either 1 point or 2 point administration The satellite symbol must be installed at all connection points between the blue field and the information outlet It must also be installed at the information outlet itself Example 4 Pair Labeling to Information Outlet on page 177 shows an example labeling scheme for 4 pair circuits from the equipment room to the information outlets The labeling scheme for 3 pair circuits from the MDF to a satellite location Port Assignment Record Form CARRIER PORT ASSIGNMENT RECORD Page Extension Bldg Voice Voice Number Fir Terminal Terminal Slot Port Jack Old New Rm Type Color diunct Module Power User Name Use To be completed by installation technician 1764787 PDH 071596 October 2002 176 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Example 3 Pair Labeling to Information Outlet 9 I3 vct 9 H i 9 9 9 Figure notes Equipment Room Satellite Location Work Location White Row on 110 Terminal Block Purple Row on 110 Terminal Block Blue Row o
72. transceiver to the RX connector of the TO transceiver and vice versa 8 Route the cables through the media gateway and through cable organizers as provided Secure the cables to the cable tie rack Connect Duplex or High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node Duplex or High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 96 shows typical fiber optic cabling between media gateways The cable between the EI and SNI on PNI is a pre installed metallic cable H600 278 1 If no running list is available use the outer slots first in alternating order Connect the first 2 SNI slots to 3 and 20 the left most and right most of the unused slots Next use 4 and 19 and so forth 2 Addlinks to the PNs in alternating order 20 3 19 4 18 5 and so forth October 2002 95 96 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Duplex or High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node 9 9 Oo LUU NSSSSS Oo A NSSSSSSS W Ww LUU NNN 19 LUU SS C O EH a cH C O E lt gt E C cy E ECL E 3 cy na A E E 3 D C p a Lee A NSSSSSSS hd fell Ral Eu ha hd hu ha il iw X ES Z ZT gt Z e BZ e Z o m E UM AN LUU NNN cadfdup KLC 0
73. trunk connected to another media gateway tie trunk Names of the tie trunk leads must be determined from the manufacturer or supplier of the external trunk circuit 5 Administer on the Trunk Group screen on Avaya Site Administration Refer to the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software for more details Analog Tie Trunk Wiring 9 9 T4 26 0 29 T2 R1 14 gt gt 4 R2 T1 1 274 gt 30 T1 2 R1 1 2 lt lt gt Y 5 R12 E 1 284 gt 31 E2 M1 3 lt lt 0 6 M2 tie wire RBP 071796 Figure notes 1 External Trunk or Adapter 2 Tie Trunk Circuit Pack Position 1C05 Digital Tie Trunk Example This example shows how to connect digital tie trunk wiring from one media gateway to another one or any other Avaya configuration Digital Tie Trunk Wiring on page 246 shows the connections 1 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the pins from the digital trunk circuit pack to appropriate pins on the manufacturer s or supplier s external digital trunk 2 Set option switches on the port circuit pack Digital Trunk Refer to the Job Aid entitled Option Switch Settings for detailed information 4 Administer on the DS1 and Trunk Group screens through ASA Refer to the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software for more details October 2002 246 Installing and Wiring Telephones Digital Tie Trunk Wiring 9 o lt 2 9 lt gt 3 9
74. used for this function 1 Plug the RPO cable into the connector shown in Remote Power Off Cable Connections Part 1 on page 92 October 2002 91 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 2 Route the opposite end of the wires to the EPO switch The opposite end of the RPO cable connects to the internal relay gt NOTE The EPO switch and the auxiliary contacts inside the EPO switch assembly are customer provided A CAUTION The auxiliary contacts inside the EPO switch assembly must close when the switch is pressed This contact closure energizes the relay inside the power distribution unit causing the connection to the battery holdover assembly to open External Alarm Cable Connection on page 93 shows the cabling from the auxiliary contacts inside the EPO switch assembly and how they connect to the internal relay 3 Connect the RPO wires to the auxiliary contacts on the EPO switch See External Alarm Cable Connection on page 93 gt NOTE The EPO switch and the auxiliary contacts for the RPO connection are customer supplied October 2002 92 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Remote Power Off Cable Connections Part 1 psdf002i KLC 012400 Figure notes 1 o a fF WO N External Alarm Cable Connector RPO cable Circuit Breakers Pin 6 RPO Pin 2 RPO External Alarm Cable October 2002 93 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Med
75. what may be considered stages Some stages can be completed in parallel while others will require that certain tasks are accomplished before they can be completed The order that the particular stages are completed will depend on local practice and the personnel available The high level stages are Install and configure the S8700 Media Server complex Servers Ethernet switch es UPS e Customize the 58700 Media Server Avaya Multi Vantage Software translations Install the media gateways SCC1 MCC1 or G700 e Cable the media gateways e Connect the media gateway to the server complex Connect to the customer s network Servers C LAN VAL etc Install and wire telephones Complete the installation clear alarms enable alarm reporting backup translation etc Test the complete installation The high level stages as presented above represent the order they are presented here Obviously the order could be changed to accommodate local practice or requirements Install and configure the 88700 Media Server complex You can complete this stage in parallel with the install of the media gateways However we recommend that you complete this step first as it is prerequisite to many of the other stages Customize the S8700 Media Server This stage depends on the install and configure 58700 Media Server complex stage It could be put off until later in the installation process However verifying success for some stages
76. work with all Avaya S8700 media servers Select Network Connection as the connection method Use the IP address assigned to the active media server Use port 5023 6 When the record is established test it by connecting to the media server Starting Avaya Site Administration 1 Under Telephony Administration click Start ASA to launch Avaya Site Administration on the computer 2 When prompted log in October 2002 59 Customizing the Active Media Server Input Translations Contact the installation personnel responsible for translation input to download translations 1 Type save translations and press Enter to save the translations to the hard drive If the translations are not ready you may continue with the process entering minimal translations to verify connectivity to the port networks Reset Media Server gt NOTE Do not reset the media server if no translations were input or if they were not entered in bulk The following administration uses the services laptop computer connected to the active media server and uses Avaya Site Administration 1 If not already open launch Avaya Site Administration 2 Loginto the active media server as craft 3 Type reset system 4 and press Enter to have the call processing software read the copied translations Add Media Gateways gt NOTE Do this procedure only if the translations were not input earlier The following administration uses the services laptop c
77. you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant It is recommended that repairs be performed by Avaya certified tech nicians The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public ser vice commission or corporation commission for information This equipment if it uses a telephone receiver is hearing aid compati ble Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equip ment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment DECLAR
78. 01 fF WO Iw Reset LEDs on Power Distribution Unit on page 286 Important Warning for 1145B2 Power Supply Ay WARNING Important Safety Instructions follow When operating this equipment basic safety precautions must be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and personal injury including the following October 2002 279 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Read and understand all instructions Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces For continued back up protection and battery reliability replace batteries every four years Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the products Clean products only with a dry rag Do not use this product near water For mounting security follow all installation instructions when mounting product Openings on top and bottom of power unit are provided for ventilation Do not block or cover these openings Do not exceed recommended environmental temperatures Operate these products only from the type of power source indicated on the product labels The power unit is equipped with a 3 wire grounding plug a plug having a third grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding power outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact an electrician to replace the outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug Do not allow anything to rest on or spill into the products
79. 02 244 Installing and Wiring Telephones 2500 Type Analog Telephone Wiring 9 T 2 28 T3 R 34 gt 03 R3 2500wire RBP 071996 Figure notes 1 2500 Type Analog Station 2 TN2183 Analog Line Circuit Pack Position 1C01 Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations 8510T BRI Pin on 4 wire 2 wire 302D with adjunct Analog Modular 8400 Series 8400 Series speaker Station Plug 606A1 603E phone Modem NT1 1 TXT 2 TXR T 3 PXT TXT R 4 T PXR T 5 R PXT No R 6 PXR TXR Connection 4 pin F 48VDC 48VDC 48VDC modular jack 48VDC 8 GRD GRD GRD GRD Circuit TN754C TN2181 TN556D TN2183 TN2198 Pack 4 wire 2 wire digital ISDN BRI Analog line 2 wire BRI digital 16 port line 16 port line 8 port TN2224 2 wire digital 24 port PX PBX transmit T Tip A TX Terminaltransmit R Ring B Analog Tie Trunk Example This example shows how to connect analog tie trunk wiring from one IP Connect or Multi Connect configuration to another one or any other Avaya configuration 1 Set the option switches on the port circuit pack such as TN760E 2 Referto the Job Aid entitled Option Switch Settings for detailed information October 2002 245 Installing and Wiring Telephones 3 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the pins from the tie trunk circuit pack to the appropriate leads on the external tie trunk 4 Analog Tie Trunk Wiring on page 245 shows a media gateway tie
80. 1 13 6 and press Enter Log in as craft At the prompt type almenable d b and press Enter Type almenable and press Enter to verify that the alarms are enabled Log off o a Aa Q N Enable alarms to INADS via SNMP gt NOTE Do these steps only if a Secure Service Gateway SSG is being installed For further information on the SSG device see Avaya personnel only http 135 8 11 4 team sra The following administration is done on a computer used to access the active Avaya S8700 Media Server using an MS DOS command line interface 1 Click Start gt Run to open the Run dialog box 2 Type telnet 192 11 13 6 and press Enter 3 Loginas craft October 2002 298 Completing the Installation Administration 4 Atthe prompt type almsnmpconf d ipaddress c community name and press Enter Where ipaddress is the trap receiver address for the SSG device and community name is the community string name required by the SSG device 5 Type almsnmpconf and press Enter Verify that the correct information was entered At the prompt type almenable s y and press Enter 7 Type almenable and press Enter Verify that the SNMP alarm origination is enabled If used verify that alarm origination via modem is still enabled Register the system Follow the existing process and procedures to register the Avaya 88700 Media Server Let customers know what the default LAN security settings are they may want to change them after installation Mak
81. 1 data and should not be attempted while DS1 facilities are active Check for Red LEDs 1 Turnon the Stratum 3 clock and wait 40 50 seconds to allow the system to complete the on board diagnostics before checking LEDs 2 If there are any red LEDs follow the procedures in Stratum 3 Clock LED Indicators Stratum 3 Clock LED Indicators Card LED Label Procedure PAI REF A Check that the CI circuit pack on the left is inserted properly Check wiring for DS1 in carrier A which connects the media gateway to the CSU and the External Synchronization Clock at the MDF through a Y cable assembly If all else fails to clear the LED then replace the circuit pack PAI REF B Check that the CI circuit pack on the right is inserted properly Check wiring for DS1 in carrier B which connects the media gateway to the CSU and the External Synchronization Clock at the MDF through a Y cable assembly If all else fails to clear the LED then replace the circuit pack PAI STA Replace the ST3 card PAI ST B Replace the ST3 card CI FAIL Check wiring for its associated DS1 reference and replace the circuit pack if necessary ST3 FAIL Replace the circuit pack ST3 LOCK Ignore this LED ST3 HOLDOVER Ignore this LED ST3 FREE RUN Ignore this LED TOCA FAIL Replace the circuit pack TOCA PORT ALM Replace the circuit pack if necessary Verify Timing to the Media Server 1 To administer the Stratum 3 clock type change synchronization and press Enter
82. 151A2 power supply Adjunct power can be provided from the equipment room or equipment closet with the 1145B power unit Go to Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies on page 278 for power supply information and installation procedures October 2002 243 Installing and Wiring Telephones 400B2 Adapter Connecting to a Modular Plug 1749428 KLC 060396 Figure notes 1 Flush Mounted Information Outlet 4 400B2 Adapter 2 Surface Mounted Information Outlet 5 To Telephone 3 ToIndividual Power Unit 6 Destination Service Access Point DSAP Power Cord Connect an Analog Station or 2 Wire Digital Station This example is typical of the 2 wire digital stations 2420 64xx 302D 2 wire analog stations 2500 analog Central Office CO trunks Direct Inward Dial DID trunks and external alarms See 2500 Type Analog Telephone Wiring on page 244 1 Choose a peripheral to connect such as a 2 wire digital station 2 Choose the port circuit pack to use and its carrier and slot number from Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations on page 244 For example TN2183 Analog Line Cabinet 1 Carrier C Slot 1 3 Choose a port circuit on the port circuit pack for example port 3 4 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the pins from the 2 wire digital station to the appropriate pins on the port circuit pack 5 Administer using Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software October 20
83. 2 199 Connect the Hardware Connect Avaya SCC1 media gateway IPSI and maintenance circuit pack ribbon cables 1 Remove the ground plate upper and lower rear covers from the SCC1 media gateway s SS SS Ss SS amp SS x cadscati KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Media Gateway B A Ground plate 2 MediaGateway A 5 Lowerrear cover 3 Upper rear cover 2 Unseatthe TN2312AP and TN775D circuit packs in the SCC1 media gateway A For high critical reliability configurations unseat the TN2312AP circuit pack in SCC1 media gateway B 3 With the red line on the bottom pin 1 attach one end of the short ribbon cable to the connector on the component side of the TN2312AP IPSI circuit pack 4 Push the tabs on the ends of the connector inward to lock the connector in place October 2002 200 Connect the Hardware cadsinst LJK 030102 5 Thread the ribbon through the slot on the front panel 6 Attach the other end of the short ribbon cable to the bottom connector on the component side of the TN775D maintenance circuit pack red line on the bottom October 2002 201 Connect the Hardware cadsdupx LJK 030102 gt Push the tabs on the ends of the connector inward to lock the connector in place Thread the ribbon through the lower slot on the faceplate of the TN775D circuit pack For high or cr
84. 2 255 255 2554 255225522554 25572997299 2557259255 255 255 255 299532994299 A A 255 255 255 2990 2 00 209 2554255402554 dad qq adig de 2009 4 BO ee 9 258 255 258 25529972997 255972597 259 O OOT E OOO OO OO GO 3d 7 Type in the following information gt NOTE Enable the Ethernet port last after you have filled in the information in the other fields Set Slot field to UUCSS where UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot The Code and SFX fields are automatically populated with TN799DP Inthe Node Name field type the same node name entered on the Node Name screen In the Subnet Mask field use the default setting unless you are given a different subnet mask Inthe Gateway Address field use the address you are given or leave blank Set the Net Region field to 1 unless you are given a different number Setthe Enable Eth Pt fieldto y 8 Press Enter to save the information and effect the new settings Refer to the Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software for more information on these administration steps and for the steps to administer IP Softphones and H 323 trunks Test the External Connection to the LAN To test the external IP connections ping the C LAN and ping a known computer connected to the network If everything is configured correctly the Result column on the Ping Results screen reads pass If it reads abort verify the IP address in
85. 2002 179 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables 9 9 le Je 9 5 9 o NEW796 THC 031296 N A A AN AN YN Y Figure notes 1 Trunk Auxiliary Field 6 Alternate Block Rows 2 To Expansion Control Carrier AUX 7 RJ2IX RJ2GX Network Interface Sonic 8 Sneak Fuse Panel 3 oo Cable WP90929 List 9 B25A Cable 4 Concentrator Cable WP90929 List ME eee ans 3 11 Media Gateway 5 A25D Male to Male Cable Connect Trunk Pairs to Media Gateway Using Jumper Wires To Establish 3 Pair Modularity 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 1 Pair Trunks on page 180 and 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 3 Pair Tie Trunks on page 181 show trunk pairs connected to the media gateway with jumper wires to establish 3 pair modularity October 2002 180 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration To connect the trunk pairs to the purple field 1 Connect B25A cables between the network interface and the sneak fuse panels See 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 1 Pair Trunks on page 180 2 Connect A25D B25A cables from the sneak fuse panels to the 110 type terminal block type connecting block connectors in the green field 3 Connect I pair patch cords jumper wires from each 110 type terminal block row in the green field to the 110 type terminal block rows in t
86. 254 202 Local network administrator supplied information as required for Get and Set community name strings Cable the RJ45 connector on the UPS 2 SNMP module to the next available port on the Ethernet switch for Control Network A CNA High critical reliability configurations For high and critical configurations use the following addresses and cable connection information UPS IPaddress Subnet mask 198 152 255 239 255 255 255 0 October 2002 54 Configure the UPSs Default Gateway IP address 198 152 255 202 Host Table trap receiver IP address 198 152 255 202 Local network administrator supplied information as required for Get and Set community name strings e Cable the RJ45 connector on the UPS 2 SNMP module to the next available port on the Ethernet switch for Control Network B CNB October 2002 Configure the Avaya Ethernet Switch if used Configure the Avaya Ethernet Switch if gt NOTE These instruction apply only if using a new Avaya supplied Avaya Ethernet switch The SNMP subagent in the Ethernet switch must be administered so it can report alarms to the appropriate media server when the hardware experiences problems Refer to the filled out Job Aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Form S8700 Media Server for the proper addresses and community strings At a minimum the following items need to be configured IP address 1 for each equipped Ethernet switch e Subnet mask T
87. 3 if required A WARNING 8700 Multi Connect configuration grounding must comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the applicable electric code in the country containing the equipment Ground DC power media gateways on page 106 and Connect DC Power on page 110 or Ground and Connect AC Powered Media Gateways on page 117 Connect Time Division Multiplexing Bus Cables on page 119 Verify Port Media Gateway Address Plugs on page 121 Install Rear Panels on page 122 Install Rear Ground Plates Media Gateways with Earthquake Protection on page 123 or Install Front Ground Plates Media Gateways with Radiation Shielding and Earthquake Protection on page 124 or Install Media Gateway Clips Media Gateways without Earthquake Protection on page 126 Connect 8700 Multi Connect configuration Cables on page 127 Check the customer s order and the shipping packing lists to confirm all equipment is present Check the 8700 Multi Connect configuration adjuncts for damage and report all damage according to local shipping instructions If any equipment is missing report the information to your Avaya representative Unpack and Inspect Media Gateways CAUTION Lifting the media gateway requires two people as it may weigh as much as 130 pounds
88. 31202 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 Media Gateway 1 PN1 with 1 Switch Node Port Networks 2 through 16 H600 278 Metallic Cable To other port networks Connect High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 97 shows typical fiber optic cabling between media gateways The cable between the EI and SNI on the PN1 media gateway is a pre installed metallic cable H600 278 Connect the cables between PN1 and each of the other PN media gateways in an alternating port slot order 3 19 4 18 5 17 and so forth Media Gateway 1 is PN1 with 1 Switch Node October 2002 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node 9 9 A NSSSSSS Oo LP NNN Oo LUU SS I SS eee ee SMM ANN LUU NSSSSSS KC cH cH C O E lt gt E a 3 cy gt ECL E 3 cy n A E 3 amp 39 na A p E o 5995559 m LUU NSSSSSSS cadferr KLC 031202 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 Media Gateway 1 PN1 with 1 Switch Node Port Network 2 through 15 H600 278 Metallic Cable To other port networks Connect Critical Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node C
89. 40 CJL 101396 Out Of Building Analog Telephones Part of Main Distribution Frame MDF Station Side Media Gateway Side White Field Purple Field Cross Connect Jumpers Tip and Ring Wires Off Premises Protection Requirements Both building entrances require carbon block or equivalent protection and sneak current protection Protection can be provided by e a4 type protector which is equipped with a heat coil a3 type protector plus a separate sneak current protector The 4 type protector is the preferred device For installations not using primary protection 4 type protectors should always be used When the 3 type protector is already installed a separate sneak current protector is required October 2002 264 Installing and Wiring Telephones The multi pair protector units and the off premises cabling must be locally engineered Connected multi pair protector units female 25 pair connector are recommended Analog Line Circuit Protectors on page 264 shows the recommended protectors The protectors can be ordered from the Premises Distribution Systems Equipment and Supplies Catalog Analog Line Circuit Protectors Primary Sneak Current Primary with heat coil Protectors 3B1A carbon 4B1C carbon 220029 Fuse 3B1E W 4B1E W SCP 1 wide gap gas tube wide gap gas tube 3C1S 4C1S solid state solid state 1 The 3 type protectors should be used only if they are already part of the
90. 44 To Y Cable Clock End Secondary W O 3 V O 43 Lead Lead Co O W 4 O V 4A Designatio Color nne n ctin g Blo ck Ter mi nal To Tone Clock Carrier B ALRMS5B ALRMSB V G 45 ALRM5A ALRMS5A G V 46 BPWRRTN R BR 17 ALRM4B 21 ALRM4B 21 BK BL BK B L BPWRLST BR R 18 ALRM4A Do ALRM4A 22 BL BK BL B K REF2RTN 7 ALRM3B R BR 17 ALRM3B R BR 17 W BR REF2LST 8 ALRM3A BR R 18 ALRM3A BR R 18 BR W SCLKRTN R BL 11 ALRM2B R BL 11 ALRM2B R BL 11 SCLKLST BL R 12 ALRM2A BL R 12 ALRM2A BL R 12 SPWRRTN R G 15 ALRMIB Y BL 31 ALRMIB Y BL 31 SPWRLST G R 16 ALRMIA BL Y 32 ALRMIA BL Y 32 REFIRTN W G 5 ALRMOB W BR 7 ALRMOB W BR 7 REFILST G W 6 ALRMOA BR W 8 ALRMOA BR W 8 October 2002 138 Install the Stratum 3 clock Cross Connects for High or Critical Reliability From Stratum 3 Clock To Y Cable Clock End Primary Connec Connec ting ting Block Block Lead Lead Termin Lead Lead Termin Designation Color al Designation Color al CCAOIR R S 19 V BL 41 EXTSYNOT CCAOIT S R 20 BL V 42 EXTSYNOR CCBOIR 21 Y G 35 BK B EXTSYNIT L CCBOIT 22 G Y 36 BL B EXTSYNIR K CCAO2R BK O 23 V BL 41 EXTSYNO T CCAO2T O BK 24 BL V 42 EXTSYNO R CCB02R BK G 25 Y G 35 EXTSYNI T CCBO2T G BK 26 G Y 36 EXTSYNI R October 2002 139 Installing the Avaya G700 Media Gateway Installing the Avaya G700 Media Gateway An Avaya G700 Media Gateway or an Avaya G700 Media Gateway with an S8300 Media Server configured as a Local Spare Processor LSP ma
91. 58700 Multi Connect configuration is supplied with cable ductwork the media gateways must be level from front to rear and from side to side They must be square with respect to each other to within 1 8 in 0 3 cm 11 Insert the threaded rods through the media gateway bottom and thread into the concrete floor anchors 12 Place a 3 8 in flat washer onto each rod Thread a 3 8 16 hex nut onto each rod and tighten securely 13 Repeat this procedure for each media gateway to be installed including the auxiliary cabinet if required Earthquake Mounting Raised Computer Floor 3 8 inch flat washer Nut welded to frame threaded rod raised variable floor height 3 8 16 lt Concrete floor anchor concrete subfloor cab base CJL 052096 October 2002 71 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect AC Power and Ground CAUTION The equipment room AC power and ground wiring must be performed by a qualified electrician Refer to Designing the Avaya S8700 Media Gateway Multi Connect Configuration for site requirement information A CAUTION The power circuit must be dedicated to the S8700 Multi Connect configuration and must not be shared with other equipment and must not be controlled by a wall switch The AC receptacle should not be located under the MDF A CAUTION 8700 Multi Connect configuration grounding must comply with the general rules for grounding contained in
92. 700 Media Server Web Interface while connected to the active media server 1 From ASA type list ipserver interface and press Enter e Verify that all ISPI circuit packs are translated 2 From the 8700 Media Server Web Interface under Diagnostics click on Execute Pingall Select Other Server s All IPSIs Ethernet switches and click on Execute Pingall Verify that all endpoints respond correctly Verify IPSI firmware version 1 From the 8700 Media Server Web Interface under Installation and Upgrades click on View IPSI Version Select Query All and click on the button View IPSI Version October 2002 212 Connect the Hardware e Verify the firmware release for each TN2312AP IPSI If upgrade is required go to Upgrade tab above to upgrade the IPSI firmware Enable control of IPserver interfaces gt NOTE The next procedure will enable the IPSI circuit packs and allow them to control the port networks 1 Type change system parameters ipserver interface and press Enter qum system parameters ipserver interface Page l of 1 S IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI SYSTEM PARAMETERS SERVER INFORMATION IPSI Host Name Prefix vodka Primary Control Subnet Address 198 152 254 0 Secondary Control Subnet Address 198 152 255 0 OPTIONS Switch Identifier A IPSI Control of Port Networks enabled E E 2 Setthe IPSI Control of Port Networks field to enabled 3 Press Enter to effect the change Verify License Status The follow
93. 8 bits 1 stop bit 4 Press Enter The Main Configuration screen appears If the Main Configuration screen does not appear press Enter again 5 Type BR 0 and press Enter Sets the BOOTP retry counter to zero 6 Type IP 198 152 254 239 and press Enter Default IP Address for this UPS 7 Type NM 255 255 255 0 and press Enter Default subnet mask for this UPS 8 Type GW 198 152 254 201 and press Enter Default gateway for this UPS gt NOTE 10 If a Network Management System NMS is going to monitor the UPS units coordinate the assignment of community names with the LAN administrator refer to the filled out Job Aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms 8700 Media Server If an NMS is not going to monitor the UPSs set the community names to unique string values If supplied enter the Get and Set community names with the following commands Type CG lt name gt and press Enter Where name is a unique string Enters the Get community name Type up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the name The name field is case sensitive and cannot contain blanks Type CS lt name gt and press Enter Where name is a unique string Enters the Set community name Type up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the name The name field is case sensitive and cannot contain blanks Type HS and press Enter Displays the Host Table October 2002 53 Configure the UPSs gt NOTE 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 The Hos
94. 87 1151A2 power supply 287 1217A power supply 119 258A adapter 161 259A connector 217 26B1 selector console 256 2 wire digital station wiring 243 302D attendant console 256 356A adapter 161 3 pair and 4 pair modularity 252 3 pair modularity 179 3 pair to 4 pair station circuits 165 3 pair trunks cabling 155 451A extension adapter 163 4C3S 75 enhanced protector 264 4C3S 75 enhanced protector installing 265 4 pair station circuits 165 808A emergency transfer panel 266 267 269 A AC power 119 129 130 checking voltage 94 connecting 80 connecting to DC power cabinet 87 ground wiring 73 75 117 grounding 71 117 single phase 72 three phase 72 AC power receptacle location 103 AC DC mixed power and ground 89 AC DC powered cabinet connecting 89 access media server directly 299 remotely over modem 302 remotely over network 301 Access Security Gateway turning on 23 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 335 Index adapter 258A 356A BR2580A ZD8AJ 161 451A extender 163 adapters TN2302AP Amphenol adapter 224 address plugs cabinet 121 adjunct power 241 242 connection locations 253 administer IP Media Processor 225 IPSI 60 IPSI circuit pack 205 TN2312AP IP Server Interface 60 TN799DP C LAN circuit pack 219 administering patch cords and jumpers 175 administration terminals 172 alarm connections 257 alarm wiring 243 alarms 318 terminal alarm not
95. 8700 Media Server with Avaya MCC1 or SCCI Media Gateways This procedure is for installing a new Avaya S8700 Media Server with Avaya MCCI or SCCI Media Gateways referred to as the S8700 Multi Connect As part of the procedures for configuring the various pieces of hardware you use 3 administration interfaces media server web interface Avaya Site Administration interface and a Linux command line interface We recommend that you have the following documents on hand for the installation These are included in the Avaya 8300 and S8700 Media Server Library CD 555 233 825 Getting Started with the Avaya 8700 Media Server with Avaya MCCI and SCCI Media Gateway 555 233 141 a quick reference guide providing physical installation and connection information Filled out Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S8700 Media Server job aid providing the customer s network information needed to configure the control network components and other IP components Get from Avaya project manager Avaya software technician or customer network administrator Pre Installation Information S8700 Media Server job aid providing lists of required hardware computer hardware and software specifications and PC network configuration to access the media server Available on the Avaya 8300 and 88700 Media Server Library CD 555 233 825 Installing the Avaya 8700 Media Server with G600 Media Gateway part of the HTML library providing info
96. 8A Emergency Transfer Panel and Telephone Installation Examples on page 267 Install External Ringing on page 276 Install the Queue Warning Indicator on page 277 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies on page 278 Refer to the Job Aid entitled Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts for information on pinouts October 2002 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connect Telephones Various analog digital and IP telephones can be connected to the media gateway These telephones include e Connectable Telephones and Consoles on page 240 e Connecting a Typical Telephone on page 241 e Connect Adjunct Power on page 242 e Connect an Analog Station or 2 Wire Digital Station on page 243 Connectable Telephones and Consoles The following telephones and consoles can connect to any Avaya media gateway Connectable Telephone and Consoles Telephone and Console Models Type 2500 2554 Analog 2420 IP Digital 2520B Explosive Atmosphere Analog 3127 Avaya Soundstation SoundPoint Speakerphones Analog 3127 ATR STD EXP APE APX MIC PMI 3127 Avaya Soundstation SoundPoint Speakerphones Digital 3127 DCP DCS DCE DPE DPX DDP DDX MIC PMI 46xx series 4602 4606 4612 4620 4624 4630 62xx series 6211 6219 64xx series 6402 D 6408D 6416D D M 6424D D M 9040 Avaya TransTalk Enhanced Attendant Consoles 302D 603F Avaya C
97. 9 19 TI I2 I3 I4 I5 16 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Xe press CANCEL to quit press NEXT PAGE to continue J Test Media Server Interchange CAUTION An interchange causes a brief service interruption Use the media server Web interface Click on Interchange Servers to view the Interchange Servers screen Do not check Force interchange regardless of server status to allow file synchronizations to complete before the interchange proceeds Click on Interchange to interchange the active and standby servers October 2002 4 309 Testing the Complete Configuration Click on Interchange again to interchange the active and standby servers back to the original status Test the IPSI Circuit Pack Use Avaya Site Administration 1 Type test ipserver interface UUC and press Enter to test all clock and packet interface components within the IPSI circuit pack Verify the screen displays Test Results screen similar to Sample IPSI 01A Test Results Screen Page 1 8700 Multi Connect Sample IPSI 01A Test Results Screen Page 1 S8700 Multi Connect f test ipserver interface la Page i TEST RESULTS Port Maintenance Name Alt Name Test No Result Error Code 01A TONE BD 46 PASS 01A TONE BD 52 PASS 01A0201 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0201 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0202 ETR PT 42 PASS 01A0202 ETR PT 43 PASS 01A0203
98. 9 C stli2clan 255 255 0 MEDPRO 01E04 TN2302 stl2prowler 1 259729940 VAL 01C08 TN2501 VAL 1 25525250 2 DOVADO VADO 2554255 2554 255 255 4255 ZOOS LOIS 21D OS 255 2 55 20 0 255 255 255 255 255 2554 295 255 2594 2095995209 255425542554 255 255 255 Ade HOO AU E 172 22 22 2594 T L42422 4 22 0294 1 172 22 22 254 OOO OO OO Oo OOOO OOo 2 7 Set the Enable Eth Pt field to y Set the Type field to VAL Type the circuit pack location in the Slot field UUCSS If a TN2501AP circuit pack is not at this location when you submit the screen the software prompts you to enter a VAL circuit pack location Inthe Node Name field enter the Node Name you entered with the change node names ip command If you press Help a list of administered node names appears including the name you administered with the change node names ip command and you can select from the list Set the Subnet Mask field according to your network requirements Gateway address is usually the same as the TN2501 AP circuit pack s IP address usually with the fourth octet changed Be sure to set this address according to your network requirements Press Enter to save the changes Administer the data module 1 Type add data module extension and press Enter The Data Module screen appears Use this screen to administer the data module that is associated with the TN2501AP ethernet port October 2002 235 236 Connecting to th
99. ADHIN li 9 Type show control interface Press Enter The IP address subnet mask and default gateway information will be displayed Verify that the proper information was entered 10 Ifrequired type set control gateway gateway where gateway is the customer provided IP address for their gateway Press Enter 11 Ifrequired use the set vlan priority set vlan tag set vlan id and set diffserv commands to enter VLAN and diffserv parameters for the IPSI Use the help command to obtain syntax guidelines for these commands 12 Type reset Press Enter Answer Y to the warning October 2002 211 Connect the Hardware gt NOTE Resetting the IPSI will terminate the administration session If further administration is required initiate a new telnet session to the IPSI 13 Check the LCD Verify that it has an I P with a filled in V showing at the bottom See IP Server Interface LEDs NZ cKO fpdlled1 LJK 022502 E 14 If logged into the IPSI type quit to logoff the IPSI 15 Disconnect the laptop from the faceplate gt NOTE Always use the arp d 192 11 13 6 command see step four to clear the ARP cache on the laptop before connecting to another IPSI If the cache is not cleared the laptop will appear to hang and will not connect to the next IPSI 16 Repeat for each IPSI circuit pack Verify connectivity to the media servers The following procedure is performed from both ASA and the S8
100. ATIONS OF CONFORMITY United States FCC Part 68 Supplier s Declaration of Conformity SDoC Avaya Inc in the United States of America hereby certifies that the equipment described in this document and bearing a TIA TSB 168 label identification number complies with the FCC s Rules and Regu lations 47 CFR Part 68 and the Administrative Council on Terminal Attachments ACTA adopted technical criteria Avaya further asserts that Avaya handset equipped terminal equip ment described in this document complies with Paragraph 68 316 of the FCC Rules and Regulations defining Hearing Aid Compatibility and is deemed compatible with hearing aids Copies of SDoCs signed by the Responsible Party in the U S can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are avail able on the following Web site http www avaya com support select Declarations of Conformity All MultiVantage system products are compliant with FCC Part 68 but many have been registered with the FCC before the SDoC process was available A list of all Avaya registered products may be found at http www part68 org by conducting a search using Avaya as manufacturer European Union Declarations of Conformity CE Avaya Inc declares that the equipment specified in this document bearing the CE Conformit Europe nne mark conforms to the European Union Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999 5 EC including
101. AVAYA Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server with Avaya MCC1 or SCCI Media Gateways Release 1 2 I 2 ssue October 2002 Copyright 2002 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However informa tion is subject to change Preventing Toll Fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications sys tem by an unauthorized party for example a person who is not a cor porate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Be aware that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications ser vices Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support in the United States and Canada call the Technical Service Center s Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 How to Get Help For additional support telephone numbers go to the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support If you are Within the United States click Escalation Lists which includes escalation phone numbers within the USA Outside the United States click Escalation Lists then click Glo bal Escalation List which includes phone numbers for the regional Centers of Excellence Provid
102. Any of these power sources can supply 60 Hz power to the AC load e Single phase 4 wire 120 240 VAC supplying 240 VAC This source has 2 hot wires 1 ground wire and 1 neutral wire J58890CE e Single phase 4 wire 120 208 VAC supplying 208 VAC This source has 2 hot wires 1 ground wire and 1 neutral wire J58890CE e Single phase 3 wire 208 or 240 VAC This source has 2 hot wires and 1 ground wire J58890CH Either of these power sources can supply 50 Hz power to the AC load e Non US 5 wire Y 220 380 VAC This source has 3 hot wires 1 neutral wire and 1 ground wire e Non US Delta 4 wire 220 or 240 VAC This source has 3 hot wires and 1 ground wire 1 Describes the power sources and required AC input power October 2002 73 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway AC Power Sources and Plug Type Power Distribution Unit Power Sources Power Input AC power distribution Single phase 120 VAC with 120 VAC 60 Hz J58890CE 1 and neutral NEMA 5 50R d cow media Single phase 240 VAC with 208 240 VAC 60 gateway neutral or single phase of Hz NEMA 3 phase 208 VAC with L14 30R AC power distribution J58890CH 1 media gateway neutral Single phase 176 264 VAC 200 240 Volts 50 60 Hz NEMA L6 30R Installations outside the United States require a receptacle suitable for use in the country of installation gt NOTE The type of power required is shown on the media gateway s rear door Gr
103. Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the applicable electric code in the country containing the equipment For more information refer to Approved Grounds For information about connecting AC power and ground see e Power Requirements on page 72 e Power Supply Sources J58890CE 1 J58890CE 2 and J58890CH 1 on page 72 e Grounding an AC Powered Media Gateway J58890CE on page 73 e Connect Mixed AC DC Power and Ground on page 89 Connect AC power and ground Perform these tasks to connect AC power and ground 1 Ground AC Load Center 50 ft 15 2 m or Less from Media Gateway on page 73 or Ground AC Load Center More Than 50 ft 15 2 m from Media Gateway on page 75 2 Connect Battery Leads J58890CH 1 on page 76 3 Connect Small Battery Holdover on page 77 or Connect Large Battery Holdover on page 78 4 Connect Shorting Cable to J528890CE 2 on page 80 Connect AC Power on page 80 October 2002 72 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Power Requirements s8700 Multi Connect configuration Power Requirements Maximum DEFINITY UL Rating Label Power Capacity Iac In Max W In BTU Hr 208 24 3245 11071 26 240 21 3276 11177 71 120 40 3120 10645 44 Power Supply Sources J58890CE 1 J58890CE 2 and J58890CH 1 The connect AC power and ground procedures apply to the AC powered media gateways
104. Avaya MultiVantage Software Maximum Cabling Distance Channel Service Maximum Cabling Unit CSU Distance 551A 85 Feet 26 m 551V 85 Feet 26 m 551V EFS R 655 Feet 199 6 m EFS T1 655 Feet 199 6 m October 2002 135 136 Install the Stratum 3 clock Cross Connects for Standard Reliability From Stratum 3 Clock To Y Cable Clock End Primary Connecting Connecting Lead Block Lead Block Designation Lead Color Terminal Designation Lead Color Terminal RREFI W BL 1 V O 43 TREFI BL W p O V 44 To Y Cable Clock End Secondary RREF2 W O 3 V O 43 TREF2 O W 4 O V 44 To Tone Clock Carrier A BCLKRTN R O 13 ALRMS5B V G 45 BCLKLST O R 14 ALRMSA G V 46 BPWRRTN R BR 17 ALRM4B BK BL 21 BPWRLST BR R 18 ALRM4A BL BK 92 REF2RTN W BR 7 ALRM3B R BR 17 REF2LST BR W 8 ALRM3A BR R 18 SCLKRTN R BL 11 ALRM2B R BL 11 SCLKLST BL R 12 ALRM2A BL R 12 SPWRRTN R G 15 ALRMIB Y BL 31 SPWRLST G R 16 ALRMIA BL Y 32 REFIRTN W G 5 ALRMOB W BR 7 REFILST G W 6 ALRMOA BR W 8 CCAOIR R S 19 V BL 41 EXTSYNOT CCAOIT S R 20 BL V 42 EXTSYNOR CCBOIR BK BL 21 Y G 35 EXTSYNIT CCBOIT BL BK 22 G Y 36 EXTSYNIR October 2002 Cross Connects for High or Critical Reliability From Stratum 3 Clock 137 Install the Stratum 3 clock To Y Cable Clock End Primary Connec Connec ting ting Block Block Lead Lead Termin Lead Lead Termin Designation Color al Designation Color al RREFI W BL 1 V O 43 TREFI BL W 2 O V
105. C 61000 4 3 Electrical Fast Transient IEC 61000 4 4 Lightning Effects IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted Immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Mains Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000 4 8 Voltage Dips and Variations IEC 61000 4 11 Powerline Harmonics IEC 61000 3 2 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker IEC 61000 3 3 Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 15 Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable pro tection against harmful interference when the equipment is oper ated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interfer ence in which case the user will be required to correct the inter ference at his own expense Part 68 Answer Supervision Signaling Allowing this equipment to be operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer supervi sion signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules This equipment returns answer supervision signals to the public switched network when answered by the called station answered by the attendant or routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer
106. CC1 Media Gateways 17 Pre installation Setup 19 High level overview of installation process 21 Install and configure the S8700 Media Server complex 21 Customize the S8700 Media Server 21 Installation of the media gateways 21 Cable the Media Gateways 22 Connect the media gateway to the server complex 22 Connect to the customer s LAN 22 Install and wire telephones 22 Complete the installation 22 Testing the complete configuration 22 Download license and Avaya Authentication files 23 RFA information requirements for new installations 23 Go to the RFA Web site 24 Mount the Hardware in the Rack 25 Configuring the Hardware in the Rack 26 Configure Media Server 1 27 Power up media server 1 27 Set product ID 27 Connect and log into the S8700 media server Web Interface 28 Using Netscape 29 Using Internet Explorer 30 Verify Software Version 30 Set Date and Time 31 Set media server configuration type 31 Upgrade media server software if necessary 32 Continue Server 1 configuration 33 Install License and Avaya Authentication Files 37 Copy license and Avaya authentication files from laptop to media server 1 37 Install the license and Avaya authentication files 38 Verify Media Server 1 Connection to Customer s LAN if provided 38 Test Media Server 1 LEDs 40 October 2002 Contents 5 6 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Contents Configure SNMP Traps Disconnect from media server 1 Connect Duplication Cables Colloca
107. D display indicating connectivity status azzHe aH e edlipsi KLC 030502 dauid e Figure notes Connectivity Status 1 2 3 4 5 IPSIis connected to media server no yes yes yes yes IPSI has an IP address no no yes yes no Laptop computer is connected to no no no yes yes IPSI services port Circuit Pack LEDs Typically each circuit pack has 3 LEDs on the front panel The Circuit Pack LEDs table describes the red green and yellow LEDs and their meaning Also see Circuit Pack LEDs on Faceplate Circuit Pack LEDs LED Color Status Description Red Alarm The media server has detected a fault in this circuit pack The alarm log should contain an on board alarm The red LED is also lit briefly when a circuit pack is inserted or reset If the circuit pack passes its initialization tests the LED goes out Green Testing The media server is currently running tests on this circuit pack as part of background maintenance or demand testing This LED is also lit during initialization tests when a circuit pack is inserted or reset Yellow Busy The circuit pack is currently in use October 2002 327 Testing the Complete Configuration Circuit Pack LEDs on Faceplate fpdfled LJK 101596 Figure notes 1 Alarm LED Red 4 Latch Pin 2 Test LED Green 5 Locking Lever 3 Busy LED Yellow DS1 Converter Circuit Pack LEDs Eleven LEDs provide an indication of the state of th
108. DF At the MDF connect the other end of the cable to the assigned terminal connecting block connector Store the cable slack in the cable slack manager Repeat Steps 2 through 6 until all cables are installed Install Connector Cables Between Auxiliary Cabinet and MDF Auxiliary equipment that connects to the MDF can be mounted inside the Auxiliary cabinet The equipment connects to an ED 1E1443 10 Group 1 intraconnection panel mounted in the cabinet This intraconnection panel consists of a 110 type 100 pair wiring block Auxiliary October 2002 182 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration equipment is connected to the 110 type wiring block The wiring block is pre wired to four 25 pair female connectors mounted on the outside rear of the cabinet 1 Install D rings on the wall between the cable slack manager and the terminal connecting blocks mounted on the MDF Install a self sticking port label on the rear of each connector on the B25A connector cable See Self Stick Label on 25 Pair Cable Connector on page 156 Labels should be positioned so they will not be obscured by the cabinet connector retainers At the rear of the Auxiliary cabinet connect 1 end of the connector cable to the assigned connector Route the cable down the rear of the cabinet and through the cable slack manager to the MDF At the MDF connect the other end of the cable to the assigned terminal connecting block con
109. ED cycles from red on 1 second off 1 second to green on 1 second off 1 second Using the media server Web interface test the LEDs on the front of the media server 1 Under Diagnostics click Test Server LEDs 2 On the Test Server LEDs screen click Test LEDs 3 Observe the Active Standby and U2 LEDs on your media server and the transmit LED on your duplication card back of media server to ensure they are blinking Interpreting the test results An abnormal condition is indicated if an LED shows any of the following flashing patterns LED flashes red This indicates that the green element is either burned out or not controlled LED flashes green This indicates that the red element is either burned out or not controlled LED flashes between red and amber This indicates that the red element is stuck on LED flashes between green and amber This indicates that the green element is stuck on LED stays amber continuously This indicates that either the media server is hung or the LED controller is stuck LED stays off continuously This indicates that the media server is hung or powered off the controller is stuck or the media server is using a new or different LED controller If the media server is hung you do not need to do anything It should automatically reboot and fix itself If the media server does not reboot itself power it down and then reboot it If an LED is clearly stuck or has a burned out element i
110. Ethernet switch ports on page 294 e Back up the media server to PCMCIA flashcard on page 295 e Release busied out media server on page 296 e View alarms on page 296 Add INADS phone numbers on page 297 Enable alarms to INADS via modem on page 297 e Register the system on page 298 Verify translations The following administration is done on a computer used to access the Avaya 8700 Media Server using Avaya Site Administration 1 Type list configuration all and press Enter to view all the administered circuit packs in the system 2 Typelist ipsi and press Enter to verify the location of the IPSI circuit packs 3 Check the administration status on the following items e list station list trunk group list hunt group View alarms The following administration is done on a computer used to access the active media server using the media server Web interface October 2002 294 Completing the Installation Administration 1 Click View Current Alarms to clear any alarms View Current Alarms Product ID 1000001558 Messaging Product ID 2000000000 MIN MAT Server Yes Yes MultiVantage No No Messaging No No Server Alarms ID Source EvilD Lvl Ack Date Description 5 DpuP g MAJ N Mon Aug 19 11 40 01 2002 Duplication link down 5 sv 1 MIN N Mon Aug 19 11 26 16 2002 file sync failed for DUP Lu WD l MIN N Mon Aug 19 11 26 06 2002 Appl
111. Important File Specifications 229 Caveats 229 Installing VAL 230 Install the TN2501AP Circuit Pack 232 Administer the TN2501AP 233 Test the IP connections 236 October 2002 12 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Contents Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator 237 Installing and Wiring Telephones 239 Wiring Telephones 239 Connect Telephones 240 Connectable Telephones and Consoles 240 Connecting a Typical Telephone 241 Connect Adjunct Power 242 Connect an Analog Station or 2 Wire Digital Station 243 Analog Tie Trunk Example 244 Digital Tie Trunk Example 245 DS1 Tie Trunk Example 246 Collocated DS1 Tie Trunks 246 DS1 Tie Trunks Using T1 Channel Service Unit 246 Auxiliary Connector Outputs MCC1 and SCC1 media gateways only 249 Three Pair and Four Pair Modularity 252 Adjunct Power Connection Locations 253 Attendant Console Example 254 Task List Attendant Console Procedures 254 Attendant Console Cabling Distances Local and Phantom Power 254 Auxiliary Power 255 Hard Wire Bridging 256 Dual Wiring of 2 Wire and 4 Wire Endpoints 256 Install the Attendant Console 256 Install the 26B1 Selector Console 256 Connect External Alarm Indicators and Auxiliary Power 257 Connect Power Distribution Unit External Alarm Wires 258 Install Off Premises Station Wiring 260 Off Premises or Out of Building Stations 261 Off Premises Connections 261
112. Installing and Wiring Telephones Auxiliary Lead Appearances at AUX Connector Color Pinouts Output Power W BL 26 Major BL W 1 W O 27 Minor O W 2 W G 28 G W 3 GRD W BR 29 BR W 4 GRD W S 30 S W 5 GRD R BL 31 BL R 6 GRD R O 32 O R 7 GRD R G 33 Not Connected G R 8 R BR 34 Not Connected BR R 9 R S 35 Not Connected S R 10 BK BL 36 48 Emergency BL BK 11 GND Transfer Relay BK O 37 48 Power O BK 12 GND BK G 38 48 G BK 13 GND BK BR 39 48 BR BK 14 GND BK S 40 48 S BK 15 GND Y BL 41 48 BL Y 16 GND Y O 42 48 O Y 17 GND Y G 43 Not Connected G Y 18 October 2002 Installing and Wiring Telephones Auxiliary Lead Appearances at AUX Connector Continued Color Pinouts Output Power Y BR 44 GND AUX Power BR Y 19 48 Y S 45 GND S Y 20 48 V BL 46 GND BL V 21 48 V O 47 Not Connected O V 22 V G 48 Ext Alarm A G V 23 Ext Alarm Return V BR 49 Not Connected BR V 24 V S 50 INADS Tip S V 25 INADS Ring 1 Color designation is the main wire color and the color of the stripe on the wire The following wire colors apply W White BL Blue O Orange G Green BR Brown S Slate Grey R Red BK Black Y Yellow V Violet 2 External alarm with signal incoming to media server 3 External alarm with signal outgoing from media server Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations 8510T BRI Pin on 4 wire 2 wire 302D with adjunct Anal
113. MDF cables in place October 2002 160 Station Wiring Design Station Wiring Design The following hardware and cabling is used e Information Outlets on page 160 modular wall jacks e Station Cables on page 160 e Closets on page 161 e Site locations Satellite locations A brief description of each of the above listed items follows Ordering information is not provided for station cables and information outlets Information Outlets Information outlets are 8 pin modular wall jacks Most of the outlets are wired with push on connections Information outlets are also available that connect to a double modular plug ended 4 pair station cable routed from the MDF a site satellite location or an adapter Station Cables For clarity a station cable is either a 25 pair cable multiple 25 pair cable or 4 pair D inside wire DIW run from the equipment room site satellite location or adapter to the information outlets The following station cables are available See Example of Extending 4 Pair Station Cables on page 163 25 pair station cable Use between the equipment room and site satellite locations or adapters Use an A25D cable male to male between the equipment room and satellite closet Use a B25A cable between the equipment room and site closet or adapter Multiple 25 pair station cable Use between the equipment room and site satellite locations or adapters This cable consis
114. Mount 110P type terminal blocks on a frame 185 Install Cable Slack Managers 187 Install Sneak Fuse Panels 188 Install Coupled Bonding Conductor 191 Connect the Hardware 193 October 2002 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 11 Contents Connect the Ethernet switch cables to IPSI circuit packs 193 Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 193 Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway 193 Connect Avaya SCC1 media gateway IPSI and maintenance circuit pack ribbon cables 199 Program the IPSI circuit packs 205 Using DHCP addressing 206 Using static addressing 208 Verify connectivity to the media servers 211 Verify IPSI firmware version 211 Enable control of IPserver interfaces 212 Verify License Status 212 Connect the USB Modems 212 Co located servers 212 Separated servers 213 Connecting to the Customer s Network 215 Avaya S8700 Media Server 215 TN799DP Control LAN 216 Check your shipment 217 Install a TN799DP C LAN 217 Install the cables 217 Install the circuit packs 218 Administer the TN799DP 219 Test the External Connection to the LAN 220 The TN2302AP IP Media Processor 222 Check your shipment 222 Install a TN2302AP IP Media Processor 223 Install the cables 223 Install the circuit packs 224 Administer the IP Media Processor 225 Test the External Connection to the LAN 227 The TN801B MAP D LAN Gateway 228 TN2501 Voice over the LAN VAL 229
115. Network B Switch 1 Submit About This Screen Back up the media server to PCMCIA flashcard The following administration is done on a computer used to access the active media server using the media server Web interface 1 Place the PCMCIA flashcard into the bottom slot of the PCMCIA drive in the active media server hidlopt LJK 030102 Figure notes 1 Media Server 3 Bottom slot of PCMCIA drive 2 PCMCIA flashcard 2 Click Backup Now and select all applicable data sets Select Save ACP translations prior to backup to save translations to the media server s system disk before backing up the data October 2002 296 Completing the Installation Administration gt NOTE Customer s may want to back up using another method Backup Now Data Sets Iv Avaya Call Processing ACP Translations Iv Server and System Files M Security Files Backup Method C FTP User Name Password Host Name Directory C Email User Name at Domain Name Mail Server Local PC Card Retain 3 data sets at destination Encryption Encrypt backup using pass phrase About This Screen 3 Select Local PC card as the backup method 4 Click Backup now to back up all data to the PCMCIA flashcard Release busied out media server 1 Disconnect from the active server and reconnect to the standby me
116. O000000 0090990909 H H 99009000000 E Hose scdlled KLC 030502 Figure notes 1 Power 7 2 Configuration fault 8 3 Hard drive activity 4 Network activity CNA 2 5 Service configuration health 10 6 Active or standby mode indicator 11 U2 not defined 4 NIC ports the numbers indicate their assigned Ethernet ports LEDs for the NIC ports some NICs may not have LEDs LEDs for fiber optic duplication connectivity Status LED not used Testing the Media Server LEDs You can test some of the LEDs on the front of the media server through the media server Web interface This makes sure that the Active Standby and U2 LEDs on the front of the media October 2002 319 320 Testing the Complete Configuration server and the transmit LED on the DAJ1 duplication memory card on the back of the media server are controllable and not burned out and that the media server is not hung gt NOTE The U2 LED is controlled by the 8700 Media Server but does not have an assigned function The other LEDs are exclusively under hardware control so will not flash during the test Refer to the OEM user documentation that comes with the media server for information on those LEDs During the 1 minute test the Active Standby and U2 LEDs alternate from being on amber for second and off for 1 second off The transmit L
117. October 2002 239 Installing and Wiring Telephones Installing and Wiring Telephones The wiring procedures are the same for most Avaya telephones and other equipment This task list provides wiring examples of similar installation procedures These are examples only actual wiring procedures may vary at each site After installing the hardware the data for the telephone features must be administered These procedures are provided in the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software gt NOTE Refer to the Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals for Avaya MultiVantage Solutions to install the necessary peripheral equipment Wiring Telephones Task List Wiring Examples and Wiring Procedures Connect Telephones on page 240 Analog Tie Trunk Example on page 244 Digital Tie Trunk Example on page 245 DS1 Tie Trunk Example on page 246 Auxiliary Connector Outputs MCC1 and SCC1 media gateways only on page 249 Three Pair and Four Pair Modularity on page 252 Adjunct Power Connection Locations on page 253 Attendant Console Example on page 254 Connect External Alarm Indicators and Auxiliary Power on page 257 Connect Power Distribution Unit External Alarm Wires on page 258 Off Premises or Out of Building Stations on page 261 Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones on page 266 80
118. Off Premises Protection Requirements 263 Telephone Restrictions for Exposed Environments 264 Digital Out of Building Telephone Protection 264 Emergency Transfer Units and Associated Telephones 266 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and Telephone Installation Examples 267 Install the 808A Emergency Transfer panel 269 Install Telephones Used Only for Emergency Transfer Trunk Auxiliary Field 274 October 2002 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 13 Contents Install Telephones Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension Trunk Auxiliary Field eio Install External Ringing 276 Install the Queue Warning Indicator 277 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies 278 1145B22 Power Supply 278 Important Warning for 1145B2 Power Supply 278 Mounting the 1145B2 1146B2 Power Supply 280 Install the Wall Mounting Plates 282 Mount the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit 283 Install the Battery Mounting Wiring 283 Install the Expanded Power Distribution Unit 284 Power Up and Test the Power Supply 285 Wire the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit 285 Reset LEDs on Power Distribution Unit 286 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies 287 Important Safety Instructions for 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies 287 Using 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies 288 Connect the 1151A1 or 1151A2 Power Supplies 288 P333T PWR Power over Ethernet Stackable Switch 289 P333T
119. RTS are not supported on the BU3200A Battery Interface Unit 1 Choosean alarm to connect such as Battery Interface Failure 2 Choose the port circuit pack to use and its carrier and slot number from Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations on page 244 For example TN2183 Analog Line cabinet 1 carrier C slot 1 3 Choose a port circuit on the port circuit pack for example port 3 4 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the named pins from the alarm wires to the appropriate pins on the port circuit pack gt NOTE It is recommended that the RFA ACF and BIF alarm leads be connected to the major alarm device and the BOD alarm leads be connected to the minor alarm device 5 Connect the major and minor alarm devices to the appropriate cross connect pins on the MDF 6 Administer the alarms using the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software October 2002 External Alarm Connector Pinout Installing and Wiring Telephones Pin Designation Definition 26 Not Used 1 Not Used 27 Not Used p Not Used 28 Not Used 3 Not Used 29 Not Used 4 Not Used 30 Not Used 5 Not Used 31 Not Used 6 Not Used 32 Not Used 7 Not Used 33 RFA2 Rectifier Failure positive 8 RFA2 Rectifier Failure negative 34 ACF2 AC Failure positive 9 ACF2 AC Failure negative 35 BIF2 Battery Interface Failure positive 10 BIF2 Battery Interface Failure negative 36 BOD2 Batte
120. Ring CO Trunk Circuit 2 32 R O TLC2 Tip PBX Line Port 2 7 O R RLC2 Ring PBX Line Port 2 33 R G TST2 Tip Emergency Terminal 2 8 G R RST2 Ring Emergency Terminal 2 34 R BR TTC3 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 3 9 BR R RTC3 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 3 35 R S TTK3 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 3 10 S R RTK3 Ring CO Line Port 3 36 BK BL TLC3 Tip PBX Line Port 3 11 BL BK RLC3 Ring PBX Line Port 3 37 BK O TST3 Tip Emergency Terminal 3 12 O BK RST3 Ring Emergency Terminal 3 38 BK G TTC4 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 4 271 Installing and Wiring Telephones October 2002 272 Installing and Wiring Telephones Pin Assignments for 25 Pair Connector Continued 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 G BK BK BR BR BK BK S S BK Y BL BL Y Y O O Y Y G G Y Y BR BR Y Y S S Y V BL BL V V O O V V G G V V BR BR V V S S V RTC4 TTK4 RTK4 TLC4 RLC4 TST4 RST4 TTCS RTC5 TTK5 RTK5 TLCS RLCS5 TSTS5 RST5 COMI NOI NC2 NCI COM2 NO2 GRD 48PX Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 4 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 4 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 4 Tip PBX Line Port 4 Ring PBX Line Port 4 Tip Emergency Terminal 4 Ring Emergency Terminal 4 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 5 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 5 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 5 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 5 Tip PBX Line Port 5 Ring PBX Line Port 5 Tip Emergency Terminal 5 Ring Emergency Terminal 5 Common 1 Relay Contact Normally Open 1 Contact Normally Closed 2 Contac
121. To reduce risk of fire and electrical shock do not overload power outlets Never push objects of any kind through the power supply or distribution unit slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock To reduce risk of electric shock do not disassemble these products Return them for repair when needed Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the products are subsequently used Power down the power unit see label on power unit on how to do this and refer servicing under the following conditions f liquid has been spilled into any of the products If any of the products have been exposed to water If any of the products do not operate normally If any of the products have been dropped or damaged e If any of the products exhibits a change in performance Do not attempt to recharge batteries on your own The batteries may leak corrosive electrolyte or explode The 1145B2 power unit recharges the batteries safely Remove the batteries if the power unit will not be used for a long period of time several months or more since during this time the battery may leak Discard discharged batteries as soon as possible Discharged batteries are more likely to leak October 2002 280 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Do not store batteries in high temp
122. X wiring concepts Sizing 25 Pair and Multiple 25 Pair Station Cables Use the scale of the floor plan to determine the approximate length of each 25 pair station cable The cables must be selected and properly sized to make maximum use of the hardware at the equipment room or satellite location October 2002 174 Layout Use 25 pair B25A cables to connect adapters directly to the MDF or satellite location Staggered finger cables equipped with factory installed 25 pair connectors at both ends should be used when multiple 25 pair cables are used between the equipment room or satellite location and the adapters B25A cables are required at the equipment room or satellite location to connect the staggered finger cables to the 110 type terminal blocks Use the following information to determine the cable size cable pairs required for either 3 pair or 4 pair circuits Note the length and size on the floor plan to aid in the ordering and installation of the station cables 3 Pair Station Cable Circuits To determine the size of station cables containing 3 pair circuits multiply the number of 3 pair circuits required at the satellite location by 3 5 Then using the minimum size cable requirement round up the cable size requirement to the next highest available cable bundle size This will provide additional pairs for growth and compensate for every twenty fifth pair in a cable that is not used 4 Pair Station Cable Circuits To determi
123. a Server In addition to the TN2302AP IP Media Processor you must also install and administer a C LAN circuit pack TN799DP For C LAN installation and administration refer to TN799DP Control LAN on page 216 Install the cables 1 Determine into which port slots you are putting the TN2302AP IP Media Processor circuit packs From the rear of the media gateway 2 Connectthe amphenol connector on the adapter to the Amphenol connector corresponding to each TN2302AP slot Refer to TN2302AP Amphenol Adapter on page 224 October 2002 224 Connecting to the Customer s Network TN2302AP Amphenol Adapter addfipm2 KLC 083000 Figure notes 1 Amphenol connector to backplane 2 Tonetwork connector corresponding to TN2302AP slot 3 9 pin connector for maintenance Connect the Ethernet 1 Connect the network cable s to the ETHERNET connector on the TN2302AP backplane adapter s Refer to TN2302AP Amphenol Adapter on page 224 gt NOTE You need a CATS or better cable for 100 Mbps operation Install the circuit packs CAUTION When adding or replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap gt NOTE The TN2302AP circuit packs are hot swappable so you do not need to power down the media gateway to install them gt NOTE To properly seat the circuit pack push firmly on the front of the faceplate until
124. abling on page 142 October 2002 178 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Plug the connector cable in the AUX connector on the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier Route the connector cable through the cable slack manager to the assigned 110 type terminal block in the yellow field of the trunk auxiliary field Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables on page 179 shows trunk pairs connected to the media gateway with concentrator cables To install the cables 1 2 Connect B25A cables between the network interface and sneak fuse panels Connect A25D cables from the sneak fuse panels to the 110 type terminal block connectors in the green field Connect patch cords jumper wires from the terminal block in the green field to the associated terminal block in the purple field Connect the single fingered end of the concentrator cables to the 110 type terminal block connectors in the purple field in Step 3 Connect the other end 2 3 fingered end of the concentrator cables to the appropriate carrier slots Equipped carrier slots are identified on the CSD Mark the nomenclature strips above the carriers to identify the slots Label connectors on each end of the cables that connect to the media gateway Route the cables down the sides of the media gateway and store the excess cable slack in the cable slack manager as previously described October
125. al Equipment IECEE CB 96A Safety of Information Technology Equipment CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 UL 60950 3rd Edition Safety Requirements for Customer Equipment ACA Technical Stan dard TS 001 1997 One or more of the following Mexican national standards as applica ble NOM 001 SCFI 1993 NOM SCFI 016 1993 NOM 019 SCFI 1998 The equipment described in this document may contain Class 1 LASER Device s These devices comply with the following stan dards EN 60825 1 Edition 1 1 1998 01 21 CFR 1040 10 and CFR 1040 11 The LASER devices operate within the following parameters Maximum power output 5 dBm to 8 dBm Center Wavelength 1310 nm to 1360 nm Luokan 1 Laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo sures Contact your Avaya representative for more laser product infor mation Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following interna tional EMC standards and all relevant national deviations Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference of Infor mation Technology Equipment CISPR 22 1997 and EN55022 1998 Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement CISPR 24 1997 and EN55024 1998 including Electrostatic Discharge ESD IEC 61000 4 2 Radiated Immunity IE
126. allation When wiring is being installed for traditional telephones and consoles analog and or digital make every effort to place the phones when they can be tested Complete the installation This stage is finishing up the installation Clearing alarms enabling alarm reporting backing up the servers hooking up the modems if used and registering the configuration This stage will always come at the end of the actual installation Testing the complete configuration This stage verifies the complete configuration operation and is always the last thing you do October 2002 23 Download license and Avaya Authentication files Download license and Avaya Authentication files gt NOTE If installing a new system or adding new features to an existing system you need a license file Use the License File Remote Feature Activation RFA to obtain the license and Avaya authentication files RFA is a Web based application available to Avaya employees and authorized Business Partners that enables the creation and deployment of license files for all media server configurations The license file enables the software category release features and capacities License files are created using SAP order information and or current customer configuration information Without a valid license installed or a mismatched license The system generates a major alarm Depending upon the nature of the error a 10 day countdown timer starts b
127. allation 154 Trunk Cables Among Network Interface Sneak Fuse Panel and Media Gateway 155 Coupled Bonding Conductor 158 October 2002 Contents 9 10 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Contents Layout Installation Space Requirements 159 Sneak Fuse Panels and Emergency Transfer Units 159 110 Type Hardware 159 Cable Slack Manager 159 Station Wiring Design 160 Information Outlets 160 Station Cables 160 Closets 161 Site Locations 161 Satellite Locations 162 Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room 165 4 Pair Station Circuits 165 3 Pair to 4 Pair Station Circuit Distribution 165 Voice and Data Terminals 170 Administration Terminals 172 173 Information Outlet Locations 173 Site Satellite and Adapter Locations 173 Sizing 4 Pair Station Cables 173 Sizing 25 Pair and Multiple 25 Pair Station Cables 173 3 Pair Station Cable Circuits 174 4 Pair Station Cable Circuits 174 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration 175 Label Expansion Control Carrier Cable 177 Connect Expansion Control Carrier Outputs Cable Uti Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables 178 Connect Trunk Pairs to Media Gateway Using Jumper Wires To Establish 3 Pair Modularity 179 Install Cables Between Media Gateway and MDF 181 Install Connector Cables Between Auxiliary Cabinet and MDF 181 Mount 110A or 110P type terminal blocks on the wall 183
128. allmaster IV Internet Protocol IP Analog Digital Wireless Digital Digital October 2002 241 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connectable Telephone and Consoles Continued Telephone and Console Models Type 607A Avaya Callmaster V ACD Console Digital 606A Avaya CallMaster VI ACD Console Digital Softphones Internet Protocol IP Netmeeting H 323 IP Softphone CentreVu IP Agent Softconsole Connecting a Typical Telephone The 302D Enhanced Attendant Console is used to describe a telephone connection typically used with the 84xx 4 wire telephones The 302D does not require auxiliary power unless it has a 26C1 DXS console or Vacuum Fluorescent Display The 302D attendant console always requires auxiliary adjunct power 48 VDC Power is connected to the console through Pins 7 and 8 of the information outlet Only three consoles can be powered by the media gateway When possible the primary console should be powered from the media gateway so it has the same power failure backup as the media gateway The maximum cabling distance for the console powered from the media gateway is 350 feet 100 meters The general steps to connect a telephone are 1 Choose a device to connect such as a 302D Attendant Console 2 Choose the port circuit pack and its carrier and slot number such as cabinet 1 carrier C slot 02 3 Choose a port circuit on the port circuit pack such as Port 05 4 Install cross co
129. ardware e TN2501AP VAL circuit pack 108772583 See Faceplate of VAL circuit pack on page 231 e 10 100BaseT backplane adapter 848525887 same one used for the IP Media Processor See Backplane Adapter on page 232 LAN cable with RJ45 connectors customer supplied October 2002 231 Connecting to the Customer s Network Faceplate of VAL circuit pack fpdfval LJK 032101 October 2002 232 Connecting to the Customer s Network Backplane Adapter addfipm2 KLC 083000 Figure notes 1 Amphenol connector 3 This connector is not used for VAL 2 RJASLAN cable connection 10 Mbps uses CAT3 cable 100 Mbps uses CATS cable Install the TN2501AP Circuit Pack A WARNING To prevent electrostatic discharge ESD be sure to wear a grounding strap while handling the circuit pack 1 Insert the circuit pack into any port slot and close the latch securely At first the red and green LEDs are on steady then the green LED flashes If there are announcements on the circuit pack the amber LED flashes while the announcements are copied from FLASH to RAM After about 3 5 minutes all of the top 3 LEDs go out although the time is longer if there are announcements already recorded on the circuit pack gt NOTE If the TN2501AP circuit packs are at the MultiVantage software limit and you insert a VAL circuit pack the red LED on that circuit pack stays on indicating that the Mul
130. associated with idle call appearance button goes dark The Position Available lamp lights Test Selector Console Check that all selector console lamps are operational Make call to a telephone in the configuration 1 Simultaneously press and hold the Ringer Volume up button and the POS BUSY button on the attendant console This puts the console in the self test mode 2 Eachrow of lamps on the selector console lights and goes dark in sequence from top to bottom 3 Press hundreds group select button The hundreds group select lamp lights and any lamps associated with busy telephone light 4 Press Direct Extension Selection DXS button for the desired extension Audible ringing tone is heard in the ear piece on attendant console 5 Onattendant console press Release Audible ringing tone is silenced Test External Ringing Make a test call to the attendant console to verify ringing device sounds when the Night lamp on console is lighted If ringing device has not been installed by customer connect spare telephone to information outlet reserved for ringing device and make test call Test Queue Warning Indicator Make a test call to an extension associated with a Uniform Call Distribution UCD or Direct Department Calling DDC group and verify the queue warning indicator lamp lights If the queue warning indicator has not been installed by customer connect a spare telephone to the information outlet reserved for queue warning indicato
131. ation Set Static Routes Configure Time Server Set Modem Interface z 7 Continue About This Screen Update System Click CONTINUE to proceed Upgrade media server software if necessary If a software upgrade is required 1 Click the X in the upper right hand corner to close the configure server window when the Review Notices screen displays 2 Click the Upgrade tab above and go to Upgrading Software on an Initial Installation of an Avaya 88700 Media Server to upgrade to the latest issue of software October 2002 46 Configure Media Server 2 After the software upgrade is complete go to Continue server 2 configuration on page 46 If a software upgrade is not required continue on with the configure server process Continue server 2 configuration If you upgraded the software 1 Under Server Configuration and Upgrades click Configure Server to restart the configure server process If you did not upgrade the software 2 Click through the Review Notices to get to the Copy Settings page With the copy settings screen configuration data you can copy the settings from server 1 to server 2 Server 1 must be configured and running the same software version as server 2 The duplication link must be connected and the duplication interface must be up on the server 1 Copy settings If you want to copy the settings from media server 1 to media server 2 perform the following steps 1 Select Copy configuration inform
132. ation from the duplicated server 2 From the drop down menu select server 2 and click Continue 3 Onthe second Copy Settings page verify that the duplication link Ethernet interface IP addresses and subnet mask are correct 4 Click Continue and go to Update System on page 47 Configuring manually If you want to configure media server 2 step by step as you did for server 1 perform the following steps 1 Select Configure all services using the wizard 2 Click Continue to go to the Set Server Identities page 3 Hillin the fields on the Set Server Identities and the subsequent pages gt NOTE Most of the fields are populated with default settings Do not change the defaults unless the customer s network administrator requests it refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S8700 Media Server Set Server Identities e Configure Interfaces October 2002 47 Configure Media Server 2 e Configure LSP e Configure Switches Set DNS DHCP Set Static Routes Configure Time Server e Set Modem Interface Update System Update System 1 When the Update System page displays click Continue to update the server gt NOTE The media server is not configured until you click Continue on the Update System page The Update System screen displays each configuration task as it completes it The last line says System modifications completed Verify Media Server 2 Connectio
133. authentication files October 2002 25 Mount the Hardware in the Rack Mount the Hardware in the Rack Refer to Getting Started with Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration for installation information October 2002 26 Configuring the Hardware in the Rack Configuring the Hardware in the Rack After you have installed all the hardware in the rack you must configure the components and connect them together This section covers the following tasks Configure Media Server 1 on page 27 Connect Duplication Cables on page 43 Configure Media Server 2 on page 43 Connect UPS Ethernet Cables to Ethernet Switch on page 50 Configure the UPSs on page 51 Configure the Avaya Ethernet Switch if used on page 55 Once the hardware is installed you must upgrade the software on the two media servers configure them install the license and Avaya authentication files and test the connectivity to the customer s LAN You upgrade and configure the first media server verify its operation then upgrade and configure the second media server and verify its operation October 2002 27 Configure Media Server 1 Configure Media Server 1 You must configure each media server in turn This section covers the following tasks e Connect and log into the 8700 media server Web Interface on page 28 e Verify Software Version on page 30 e Set media serve
134. binet 6 Route wires to the AC mains single point ground block and connect them Turn Circuit Breakers Off The main circuit breaker on a DC power cabinet is located on the front of the power distribution unit The circuit breakers on the rear of the power distribution unit control the individual carriers See Power Distribution Unit J58890CH on page 88 for the location of the carrier breakers 1 Setthe main circuit breaker to OFF 2 Setthe carrier circuit breakers to OFF October 2002 87 88 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Power Distribution Unit J58890CH pedf010 KLC 020599 Figure notes 1 o a fF WO N J Connect small battery holdover cable or temperature sensor cable from large battery cabinet to J20 Carrier Circuit Breakers Ground Terminal Block Connect 48 VDC Return 1 AWG 50 mm red cable here Connect 48 VDC 1 AWG 50 mm black cable 1 AWG 50 mm 50 ft 15 2 m cable to large battery cabinet For cables greater than 50 ft 15 2 m contact your Avaya representative Ground Terminal Block To AC load center or approved single point ground block Connect DC Power to the Media Gateways Be sure the main circuit breaker is OFF Measure and cut 2 pieces of 1 AWG 70 44 mm wire long enough to reach from the DC power cabinet to the first media gateway At the DC power cabinet connect the 48 volt DC wire to the DC OUTPUT circuit breaker Se
135. cable around the columns in the cable slack manager to store cable slack The first run should always go across the full length of the 5 columns in the cable slack manager e Connect the cable to the assigned connecting terminal block Avoid placing copper cables where they may bend or strain fiber optic cables Control Carrier Outputs Cable Installation A connector on the rear of the Expansion Control Carrier is labeled AUX A 25 pair cable connects the AUX connector to a 110 type terminal block in the yellow field of the trunk auxiliary field The AUX connector outputs include the following 7 DC power 48 VDC sources for emergency transfer units 3DC power 48 VDC sources for remotely powering a total of 3 attendant consoles or executive voice terminal adjuncts October 2002 155 Cable Installation Trunk Cables Among Network Interface Sneak Fuse Panel and Media Gateway The 1 pair of Central Office CO trunks are installed by the network provider in the green field Up to 24 pairs may be terminated on each row of the 110 type terminal block Tie trunks also appear in the green field with up to eight 3 pair trunks terminated on each row of the 110 type terminal block WP 90929 List 1 and 3 concentrator cables can be used to connect the media gateway to the 110 type terminal blocks in the purple field The 1 pair patch cords jumper wires are then run from the purple terminal block rows to the green terminal block rows in
136. carbon block protectors or other non plug compatible types are in place and it is too costly to reterminate the outside plant cable on a 5 pin mounting block for only a few out of building terminals Installing the ITW Linx Enhanced Protector The ITW Linx Enhanced Protector can be installed in series with existing primary protection The ITW Linx Enhanced Protector mounts directly on connecting blocks and requires a separate ground bar Installing the 4C3S 75 Enhanced Protector The 4C3S 75 protector cannot be installed in series with other types of primary protection It must be installed as the only protection on the line entering the building For the 4C3S 75 protector there are a variety of 25 50 and 100 pair protector panels equipped with 110 type connecting blocks and or RJ21X connectors Installing the Data Link Protector The maximum range for out of building digital telephones is 3400 feet when using 24 AWG 5 0 5 square millimeters wire and 2200 feet 670 meters when using 26 AWG 4 0 4 square millimeters wire The range can be extended to 5000 feet 1524 meters using 24 AWG 5 wire or 4000 feet 1220 meters using 26 AWG 4 wire with the use of a data link protector The protector is an isolating transformer used to remove phantom power on the media gateway side and re introduce it on the terminal side When a protector is used the telephone must be locally powered by an external power supply or through the AC
137. cement testing 315 rectifier module installing 82 remote access testing 315 remote access to media server over modem 302 over network 301 remote access testing 315 Remote Feature Activation See RFA remote power off cable connecting 90 reporting circuit pack damage or discrepancies 66 102 reporting damage 65 66 101 RF shielding 124 RFA 23 information requirements 23 websites 24 ribbon cables connect on SCC1 199 ringer frequency settings 119 ringing testing 314 routing cables to MDF 154 S 8700 IP Connect testing complete configuration 306 8700 media server connecting to LAN 215 LEDs 319 testing LEDs 319 8700 Multi Connect testing complete configuration 306 safety instructions 1145B power supply 278 1151A1 and 1151A2 power supply 287 SCC connecting battery 116 earthquake protection 103 SCC control cabinet connecting to DC power cabinet 109 security certificate install Internet Explorer 30 install Netscape 29 selector console 256 selector console testing 314 server separation collocated media server 43 separated media server 43 service states checking 307 set SNMP traps 41 set static IP address 208 shielding electromagnetic 124 shipping packing lists 65 101 SHOCKWATCH indicators 65 66 shorting cable 80 single phase 240VAC 72 site locations adapters 160 sneak current protection 152 sneak current protection installing 188 sneak current protec
138. ch location October 2002 214 Connect the Hardware October 2002 215 Connecting to the Customer s Network Connecting to the Customer s Network The 88700 Media Server for IP Connect and Multi Connect Configurations and other components connect directly to the customer s network The following sections provide installation administration and test information for various IP components Avaya 8700 Media Server on page 215 TN799DP Control LAN on page 216 The TN2302AP IP Media Processor on page 222 The TN801B MAP D LAN Gateway on page 228 TN2501 Voice over the LAN VALY on page 229 Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator on page 237 Avaya S8700 Media Server In a typical configuration you connect to the network through a port on the back of the Avaya S8700 Media Server using a standard CATS cable with RJ45 connectors on each end Typically for an IP Connect configuration you connect through port 1 EthO See CAT5 cable connected to a port on the back of the Avaya S8700 Media Server on page 216 Fora Multi Connect configuration you connect through one of the available 4 ports on the network interface card NIC typically the one corresponding to Eth4 The other end of the cable connects to an Ethernet switch router hub or token ring October 2002 216 Connecting to the Customer s Network CAT5 cable connected to a port on th
139. ck and Inspect Auxiliary Cabinet 66 Check Circuit Packs 66 Correct Shipping Errors 67 Position the Media Gateway 67 Position the Auxiliary Cabinet Optional 67 Install Auxiliary Cabinet Equipment 68 Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway 68 Install Concrete Floor Mounting 68 Install Raised Computer Floor Mounting 69 Connect AC Power and Ground 71 Connect AC power and ground T1 Power Requirements 2 Power Supply Sources J58890CE 1 J58890CE 2 and J58890CH 1 72 Grounding an AC Powered Media Gateway J58890CE 73 Ground AC Load Center 50 ft 15 2 m or Less from Media Gateway 73 Ground AC Load Center More Than 50 ft 15 2 m from Media Gateway 75 Connect Battery Leads J58890CH 1 76 Connect Small Battery Holdover ri Connect Large Battery Holdover 78 Connect Shorting Cable to J58890CE 2 80 Connect AC Power 80 Connect DC Power and Ground 81 Connect DC Power and Ground 81 Install Rectifier Modules and Battery Interface Unit 82 Connect Power and Ground s 83 Install Coupled Bonding Conductor Wires 86 Connect Grounds for DC Battery and Power Cabinets 86 Connect DC Power cabinet Approved Ground 86 Connect AC Power to DC Power cabinet 87 Connect Ground Wires for DC Power Systems 87 Turn Circuit Breakers Off 87 Connect DC Power to the Media Gateways 88 Connect DC Battery Cabinet to DC Power Cabinet 89 Connect Mixed AC DC Power and Ground 89 Connect Remote Power Off Cable 90 Connect External Alarm Cable 93 October 2002 Conte
140. ck cabinet circuit breaker at the DC power plant OFF 2 Attheclock cabinet connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm ground wire to the 48V terminal on the terminal strip 3 Attheclock cabinet connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire to the 48VRTN terminal on the terminal strip 4 Route the wires out of the cabinet and to the DC power plant 5 Atthe DC power plant connect the 48V wire to the DC OUTPUT circuit breaker 6 Atthe DC power plant connect the 48VRTN wire to the DISCH GRD bar Set the Clock Options There are four sets of option switches on the clock 1 Set the options on the Clock Input CI circuit pack according to CI Option Switch Settings on page 131 2 Set the options on the Stratum 3 Clock ST3 circuit pack according to ST3 Clock Circuit Pack Option Switch Settings on page 132 3 Setthe options on the Composite Clock Timing Output TOCA circuit pack according to Composite Clock Timing Output TOCA Circuit Pack on page 132 4 Setthe Stratum 2 Stratum 3 switch to the STRATUM 3 position CI Option Switch Settings Switch Function Position 1 T1 Select OFF enable default ON disable October 2002 132 Install the Stratum 3 clock CI Option Switch Settings Switch Function Position 2 CC Select OFF enable ON disable default 3 Framing Select OFF ESF ON D4 default 4 BX 25 OFF enable ON disable default ST3 Clock Circuit Pack Option Switch Settings
141. computer beyond the gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN2302AP IP Media Processor N The TN2302AP IP Media Processor is now installed in the media gateway and connected to the IP network October 2002 228 Connecting to the Customer s Network The TN801B MAP D LAN Gateway The TN801 LAN gateway interface is part of the Multi Application Platform DEFINITY MAPD It allows direct integration of a PC based application into the configuration The TN801 circuit pack works as the interface for solutions such as CTI CallVisor and PC LAN For installation and administration information refer to the DEFINITY ECS CallVisor ASAI DEFINITY LAN Gateway over MAPD Installation Administration and Mainte nance 555 230 114 book October 2002 229 Connecting to the Customer s Network TN2501 Voice over the LAN VAL The TN2501 Voice over the LAN VAL is an integrated announcement circuit pack that offers up to 1 hour of announcement storage capacity requires shorter backup and restore times is firmware downloadable plays announcements over the TDM bus e has 33 ports including dedicated telephone port for recording and playing back announcements port number 1 ethernet port port number 33 31 playback ports ports 2 32 10 100 Mb Ethernet interface allowing announcement and firmware file portability over your LAN FIP server functions e supports wav annou
142. cross connections information outlets and cables The labels are color coded to identify S8700 Multi Connect configuration wiring Green To Central Office CO Purple To 8700 Multi Connect configuration ports Yellow To auxiliary equipment and miscellaneous 8700 Multi Connect configuration leads Blue To information outlets White From Main Distribution Frame to satellite locations 3 pair Each label identifies 2 rows on the terminal block The upper half identifies the row above it and the lower half identifies the row below it The labels are inserted into the clear plastic designation strips furnished with the terminal blocks The strip is snapped in place between the terminal block rows Label code number 1220A comcode 103970000 contains all of the required labels Label Graphic Symbols and Nomenclature uo Ed lid Ad 9 E a 9 AK aeos Figure notes 1 Write Floor or Building Identification on 5 Information Outlet oii 6 Site Satellite Closet Media Gateway 7 Tie Circuit Carrier 8 Floor mior 9 Building October 2002 151 Off Premises Circuit Protection Off Premises Circuit Protection Protection from hazardous voltages and currents is required for all off premises out of building trunks lines and terminal installations Both over voltage protection lightning power induction and so forth and sneak current protection are required Sneak current protectors must be either UL
143. ct a the 6 AWG 40 16 4 mm wire to the GROUND DISCHARGE bar 3 Route the opposite end of the wire to the DC powered Distribution Unit and connect the wire to the GRD connector 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each remaining DC powered Distribution Unit October 2002 109 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Ground for the DC Powered Distribution Unit j58890r1 RBP 042296 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 DC power cabinet DC Power Distribution Unit Ground Discharge Bar 6 AWG 40 4 mm2 Wire GRD Connector Terminal on DC Powered Distribution Unit To Additional DC Powered Distribution Units if required Connect DC Power Cabinet Ground Cut a length of 6 AWG 40 4 mm wire long enough to reach between the GROUND DISCHARGE bar on the DC power cabinet and the single point ground block on the expansion control media gateway A bottom media gateway in Ground for Media Gateway on page 110 At the DC power cabinet connect the wire to the GROUND DISCHARGE bar Route the wire to expansion control media gateway A and connect to the single point ground block Repeat for each expansion control media gateway A in the 8700 Multi Connect configuration room October 2002 110 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Ground for Media Gateway dc rect4 RBP 032896 Figure note
144. cted station sets The 808A equipment s Ringer Equivalency Number REN is 1 0A At the Main Distribution Frame MDF the unit is controlled by a connection to a yellow terminal row connecting block in the trunk auxiliary field The unit is controlled by 48 VDC from the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminals There are seven EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal pairs that allow powering of up to seven transfer units Should power be restored to the relays while a call connected through the 808A is in progress the 808A maintains the connection until the user goes on hook Each 808A can handle up to five Central Office CO trunks October 2002 267 Installing and Wiring Telephones 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and Telephone Installation Examples 808A Emergency Transfer Panel on page 268 shows a typical 808A Emergency Transfer Panel The 808A connects to the Main Distribution Frame MDF with B25A or A25B cable The panel can be installed on any mounting frame in either a vertical or horizontal position The housing has ears for screw mounting and cutouts for snap mounting the unit in an 89 type mounting bracket See 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Mounting on page 269 Task List Typical Emergency Transfer Panel and Telephone Installation Install the 808A Emergency Transfer panel on page 269 Install Telephones Used Only for Emergency Transfer Trunk Auxiliary Field on page 274 Install Telephones Used fo
145. cuits Power receptacle strip Provides switched and un switched 120 VAC receptacles e DC connector block Required when the auxiliary cabinet is powered by an external DC source AC to DC power supply Converts AC power provided by the AC power strip switched outlet to the required DC voltage Install equipment inside the media gateway as specified in the CSD The following optional equipment can be installed e 909A B Universal Coupler Fan Assembly Requires 120 VAC power External Channel Service Unit CSU 1 is required for each T1 carrier link e PagePac Paging System 3 models are available All PagePac models require 120 VAC power External system announcement units may be powered by either 48V DC or 120 VAC Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway Use the correct procedure for your installation Install Concrete Floor Mounting on page 68 Install Raised Computer Floor Mounting on page 69 Install Concrete Floor Mounting 1 Position the media gateway in the exact position it is to occupy when the installation is complete 2 Insert a pencil or marker through the holes previously occupied by the carriage bolts front and rear in the bottom of the media gateway and mark the floor directly beneath each hole 3 Rollthe media gateway out of the way and drill four 1 2 in 1 27 cm diameter holes about 1 5 in 3 8 cm deep at the locations marked in Step 2 4 In
146. d line prompt when the cache has been cleared The phrase The specified entry was not found This is returned when the specified IP address does not currently contain an entry in the ARP cache 5 Type telnet 192 11 13 6 and press Enter to open the Telnet window and connect to the IPSI Prompt IPSI gt NOTE While connected to the IPSI type help or to obtain online help Most commands have two or three letter abbreviations 6 Type ipsilogin and press Enter abbreviated command il October 2002 209 210 Connect the Hardware gt NOTE The craft login used on the IPSI has a different password than the craft login used on the media servers 7 Loginas craft Prompt IPADMIN 8 Type set control interface lt ipaddr gt lt netmask gt where lt ipaddr gt is the customer provided IP address and lt netmask gt is the customer provided subnet mask Press Enter off Telnet 192 11 13 6 ME x Connect Edi Terminal Help TN2312 IPSI IP Admin Utility Copyright Avaya Inc 2888 2881 All Rights Reserved IPSI ipsilogin Login craft Password IPADMIN set control interface 135 9 78 77 255 255 255 0 WRRNING The control network interface will change upon exiting IPADMIN IPADMIN show control interface Control Network IP Address 135 9 70 77 Control Network Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Control Network Default Gateway None IPSI is not configured for DHCP IP address administration IP
147. dia server 2 UnderServer click Release Server to release the standby media server from busyout mode 3 UnderServer click View Summary Status to verify that the media server is no longer in busyout mode and verify the health of both media servers View alarms The following administration is done on a computer used to access the active media server using the media server Web interface 1 Click View Current Alarms to clear and set alarms October 2002 297 Completing the Installation Administration Add INADS phone numbers gt NOTE Do these steps only if the customer has a maintenance contract with Avaya The following administration is done on a computer used to access the active Avaya 88700 Media Server using an MS DOS command line interface 1 Click Start Run to open the Run dialog box Type telnet 192 11 13 6 and press Enter 2 3 Loginas craft 4 Atthe prompt type almcall f 9 18005353573 5 If alarms will be reported to a second number type almcall s second number and press Enter 6 Atthe prompt type almcall and press Enter Verify that the proper information has been entered Enable alarms to INADS via modem gt NOTE Do these steps only if the customer has a maintenance contract with Avaya The following administration is done on a computer used to access the active Avaya 88700 Media Server using an MS DOS command line interface 1 Click Start Run to open the Run dialog box Type telnet 192 1
148. duplication link to the media servers test the IP server interfaces expansion interfaces and TDM buses in the port networks e test the telephones and other equipment See Testing Port Network Equipment for information regarding the LED status indicators for the media servers Avaya Ethernet switch es UPSs and different circuit packs gt NOTE Circuit pack positions are usually given by cabinet carrier and slot They may also be given by port The term cabinet refers to an MCC1 Media Gateway making up one to five port networks or a stack of SCC1 Media Gateways or 4 G600 Media Gateways in a rack making up one port network A port network is defined as a group of media gateways or carriers connected together with one TDM bus Task List Test the Configuration A CAUTION To prevent unnecessary trouble tickets do not enable the alarms Alarm Origination feature until all installation and administration procedures are completed Testing Port Network Equipment on page 307 1 Check Port Network Status for Each Media Gateway Check Circuit Pack Configuration Test Media Server Interchange Test the IPSI Circuit Pack Test License File on page 309 Test Expansion Interface Circuit Packs 88700 Multi Connect only Test Time Division Multiplexing Bus for Each Port Network on Oo a A5 WO M Test Expansion Interface Exchange for Each Port Network 88700 Multi Con
149. dware in the Rack on page 25 Configuring the Hardware in the Rack on page 26 Customizing the Active Media Server on page 57 Install the Media Gateways on page 63 Cabling Media Gateways on page 141 Connecting to the Customer s Network on page 215 Installing and Wiring Telephones on page 239 Connect the Hardware on page 193 Completing the Installation Administration on page 293 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server on page 299 Testing the Complete Configuration on page 306 Troubleshooting an Installation on page 331 October 2002 Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server with Avaya MCC1 or SCC1 Media Gateways 19 Pre installation Setup Pre installation Setup The pre install team should have done the following tasks If they were not all done do not continue with the installation Verify that the 19 in 48 cm equipment rack s was installed to EIA 310D or equivalent data rack standards You may need shelves or some other means to support the very heavy UPSs Verify that the 19 in EIA 310D 48 cm open equipment rack s was installed securely and grounded per Approved Grounds Verify that cabling for the Internet Protocol Server Interface IPSI circuit packs is labeled and run from the control hardware rack to the port networks or that appropriate connectivity is provided Verify that you have the requir
150. e Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet on page 82 Connect the 48 volt RTN return wire to the ground discharge bar Route the wires out of the cabinet through the hole in the lower rear cover and to the first media gateway October 2002 89 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 5 Connect the 48 volt DC wire to the 48VDC terminal on the J58890CF Power Distribution Unit 6 Connect the 48 volt RTN wire to the 48RTN terminal on the J58890CF Power Distribution Unit terminal block 7 RepeatSteps 2 through 6 for each cabinet and auxiliary cabinet in the system Connect DC Battery Cabinet to DC Power Cabinet gt NOTE The wire in the next step must be sized for a maximum voltage drop of 0 5 VDC in each leg of the DC distribution In this example 1 AWG is used 1 Turn off the main circuit breaker on the DC battery cabinet 2 Turnoffthe main circuit breaker on the DC power cabinet 3 Measure and cut a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire long enough to reach from the DC battery cabinet s 48 Volt DC terminal to a DC OUTPUT distribution bus on the DC power cabinet 4 Atthe DC battery cabinet connect the 48 volt DC wire to the 48 VDC connector 5 Route the wire out of the cabinet through the hole in the lower rear cover and to the DC power cabinet 6 Atthe DC power cabinet terminate the 48 volt DC wire on a DC OUTPUT distribution bus Connect Mixed AC DC Power and Ground Typical Power and Ground for a
151. e TN1654 DS1 Converter Circuit Pack LEDs and the T1 E1 facilities The top group has the standard red green and yellow LEDs The red LED indicates an alarm condition and the green LED indicates testing in progress The 4 SPAN LEDs indicate the status of the T1 E1 facilities The four STATUS LEDs are currently unused and remain off October 2002 328 Testing the Complete Configuration TN1654 DS1 Converter Circuit Pack LEDs OO ruwa OOVSSSSggg 9 O i DH LAS a D EAN fpdfds1 LJK 101596 Figure notes 1 Alarm LED Red 4 STATUS LEDs 2 Test LED Green 5 SPAN LEDs 3 Busy LED Yellow The yellow LED is used to indicate the state of the fiber interface the fiber channel the control channel and the communications link to the SPE in the following manner and order of priority See DS1 Converter Yellow LED Flashing States DS1 Converter Yellow LED Flashing States LED on LED off Condition 0 1 second 0 1 second Fiber out of frame or fiber loss of signal 0 5 second 0 5 second In frame fiber channel down The fiber channel communicating between the DS1 Converter and the other fiber endpoint EI or SNI is down 1 second 1 second In frame control channel down The control channel between the 2 DSI Converters in the DS1 Converter complex is down 2 seconds 0 2 second No response from the media server The media server is not acknowledging messages from the DS1 Converter or the comm
152. e Administration on page 303 for information on installing Avaya Site Administration Command Line Interface To use a command line interface in a Telnet window click Start Run to open the Run dialog box Type telnet 192 11 13 6 When prompted log in to administer the Avaya MultiVantage software features usable on the active media server only To use a command line interface in a terminal emulation window open your terminal emulation program Establish a network connection to either the active server name or IP address Note If a connection to Avaya MultiVantage software is desired use port 5023 for this connection Avaya MultiVantage software is only accessible via the active server When prompted log in to administer the Avaya MultiVantage software features usable on the active media server only The only terminal emulation programs supported are Microsoft s HyperTerminal and Avaya Terminal Emulator Terranova is no longer supported Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Remotely over the Network You can access the Avaya 88700 Media Server from any computer connected through the LAN However make sure the LAN security settings allow remote access To access either media server use the IP address assigned to the media server you want to access You can also use the active server address to connect automatically to the media server that is active Once connected you can administer the media server using three tools Med
153. e Customer s Network a data module 30006 Page lof 1 N Data Extension 30006 Name VAL 2 Data Module one uses 1 s for Broadcast Addresses y E DATA MODULE Type ethernet Port 150333 Link 5 7 Set the Type field to ethernet Set the Port field to correspond to the circuit pack location The port number final two digits is always 33 for the TN2501AP circuit pack Set the Link field to an unassigned or next available link number Set the Network uses 1 s for Broadcast Address field according to the your network requirements Type a unique name in the Name field Press Enter to save your changes Administer IP routing if used 1 2 3 Type add ip route and press Enter Administer IP routes to the TN2501AP circuit pack Press Enter to effect the changes Test the IP connections Click Start gt Run to open the Run dialog box Type command and press Enter to open an MS DOS command window Type ping ipaddress where ipaddress is a known computer on the network and press Enter to verify connectivity Using Avaya Site Administration type status link to test the new IP connections that you have administered October 2002 237 Connecting to the Customer s Network Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator For information on the Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator refer to the documentation that comes with the R300 equipment October 2002 238 Connecting to the Customer s Network
154. e Installation Network Planning Forms S8700 Media Server for the customer supplied telephone number s Under Advanced select PPP and log on manually You may have to type in a user name and password depending on whether or not the media server you are dialing into has a non null CHAP secret key Use craft ignore the password field You need to configure your computer to access the S8700 Media Servers Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information S amp 700 Media Server for information on setting up your computer Dialing up to the media server To dial up click the connection name or icon if created Once you are connected 1 When prompted enter your remote access login name and password 2 When the Start PPP now message appears click Done When you see the Connection Complete dialog box your computer is connected to the media server October 2002 303 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server 3 Touse Avaya Site Administration launch the software and select the switch you want to dial into Refer to Installing Avaya Site Administration on page 303 for information on installing the software and build a record for a particular media server 4 To open a Telnet session click Start gt Run to open the Run dialog box Type telnet IPaddress where IPaddress is the address of the actual active media server Finding the active media server IP address 1 To get the IP address of the actual active media
155. e back of the Avaya S8700 Media Server cadinetw KLC 051602 ERLEA 259695 9999999929202 0 d Figure notes 1 2 To network S8700 IP Connect To network S8700 Multi Connect TN799DP Control LAN The TN799DP Control LAN circuit pack serves two purposes A connection for the signaling telephone network to the customer s data network for IP telephones A source board for downloading firmware to circuit packs having the P designation An IP interface for adjuncts such as Intuity Audix An IP interface for DCS connection with another Avaya configuration See the Avaya Multi Vantage Solutions Hardware Guide for more information The following sections describe the process Check your shipment on page 217 Install a TN799DP C LAN on page 217 Install the cables on page 217 Install the circuit packs on page 218 Administer the TN799DP on page 219 Test the External Connection to the LAN on page 220 October 2002 217 Connecting to the Customer s Network Check your shipment When the order arrives at your site check the contents see Required Hardware on page 217 1 Inspect the shipping carton for damage before opening it If the box is
156. e correct Ethernet port Make sure you have the correct login ID and password Refer to the user s guide that comes with the SNMP Subagent Make sure the the network card on the laptop is configured correctly Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information S8700 Media Server Make sure you are connected to the correct Ethernet port On Cajun Ethernet switch it s the port marked Console Make sure you have the correct login ID and password Refer to the user s guide that comes with the Ethernet switch Make sure the the network card on the laptop is configured correctly Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information S8700 Media Server Make sure you are connected to the correct Ethernet port Default is port 2 Eth1 on the back of the server Make sure you are using a crossover cable between the laptop and server Make sure the MAC cache is cleared In an MS DOS window type arp d 192 11 13 6 and press Enter Make sure you have connectivity In an MS DOS window type ping 192 11 13 6 and type Enter Make sure the the network card on the laptop is configured correctly Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information S8700 Media Server Make sure you are plugged into the Services port 2 Eth1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address 192 11 13 6 Make sure you are using the correct login and password Make sure your browser is configured correctly Ref
157. e is located just above the wire clip Tighten the screw securely Set the battery back up switch to the 1 32 down position Power down the 1145B2 unit as described on the label on the side of the unit Remove the output power cable between the 1145B2 and the 1146B2 units The cable will not be reused Connect the P1 connector end of the T cable to the bottom power distribution unit Connect the P2 connector to the top distribution unit Connect the P3 connector to the 1145B2 October 2002 285 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies 8 Power up the 1145B2 as described on the label on the side of the unit Power Up and Test the Power Supply The following table describes the meaning of the power supply LEDs when lit LED Color Meaning Green Power Supply is providing power Yellow Battery is charging Red Power Supply is on battery reserve 1 Connect the AC power cord to the power supply and route the cord to an appropriate AC outlet using the clips provided on the unit gt NOTE A maximum of four power supplies can be powered from one dedicated 100 120 V 50 60 Hz 20 amp feeder or 200 240 V 50 60 Hz 10 amp feeder Use only nonswitched outlets 2 Plugthe cord into the outlet This powers up the power supply 3 Check AC operation of the 1145B2 Power Supply by monitoring the LEDs PASS Green and yellow LEDs at the front of the unit should be lit together Green means the power supply is providing pow
158. e names E 5 Type display circuit pack and press Enter Verify that the TN2302AP shows up in the Code column 6 Type change ip interfaces and press Enter hange ip interfaces Page 1 of iN IP INTERFACES Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Address Rgn n MEDPRO 01B11 TN2302 prowler 255 255 255 0 l72 18 23 254 1 y C LAN 005B11 TN799 C sriclan2 255 255 248 0 172 16 23 254 3 y MEDPRO 07B09 TN2302 prowlerl 25525542248 0 Wiis 16 6236 25 43 y MEDPRO 07B10 TN2302 prowler2 255 255 248 0 lT72 16 23 2254 3 y MEDPRO 03A11 TN2302 prowler3 255 255 248 0 172 16 23 254 2 y MEDPRO 05A12 TN2302 prowler5 255 255 248 0 192 16 223 254 2 y C LAN 01A11 TN799 C traf clan 255 255 248 0 172 16 23 254 2 n 209 6200820000 n 259 299 299 0 n 255725525540 n 2095209420080 n 25542552255 0 n 2595299352920 0 n 255 255 255 0 n 2557255425570 eee 5 E gt NOTE Enable the Ethernet port last after you have filled in the information in the other fields e Set Slot field to UUCSS where UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot The Code and SFX fields are automatically populated with TN2302AP circuit packs October 2002 227 Connecting to the Customer s Network Inthe Node Name field type the same node name entered on the Node Name screen Inthe Subnet Mask field use the default setting unless you are given a different subnet mask IntheGateway Address field use the address y
159. e sure they are aware that if the following items are not set they will not have remote access to the media servers telnet no Telnet access e https no Web access e def sat no Avaya Site Administration access on Advanced screen October 2002 299 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server To administer the Avaya 88700 Media Server you must be able to access it Personal computers and services laptop computers equipped with a network PCMCIA card and Avaya Site Administration and a Web browser are the primary support access for 8700 Media Server initialization aftermarket additions and continuing maintenance You can access the Avaya 88700 Media Server either directly or remotely over the customer s local area network LAN or over a modem A direct connection and over the customer s LAN are the preferred methods Remote access over a modem is for Avaya maintenance access only This section covers the following tasks Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Directly e Accessing the Avaya 88700 Media Server Remotely over the Network e Accessing the Avaya 88700 Media Server Remotely over a Modem Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Directly You access the Avaya S8700 Media Server directly by plugging a laptop computer into the media server See Services laptop computer connected directly to the media server on page 300 You must use a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet cate
160. e the label on the battery is visible Tighten the screws securely 3 Plug the battery cord into the power supply s right rear receptacle The rear receptacle is indicated on the right label October 2002 284 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Back Up Battery Rating Battery Rating 1148B 2 5 amp hours 1149B 5 amp hours 1147B 8 amp hours Install the Expanded Power Distribution Unit A second power distribution unit can be installed to provide power to additional devices A CAUTION Total power cannot exceed 275 watts The maximum ISDN terminal mixture is 24 7500 series and 24 8500 series terminals The maximum DCP terminal mixture is 24 7400 series and 24 8400 series or 64 8400 series terminals The expanded power distribution unit kit contains One 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit One T Cable Two 8 32 x 1 2 in Shoulder Screws One 8 32 x 1 in Screw One spacer bracket Refer to Expanded Power Distribution Unit on page 282 while installing the power distribution unit 1 Set the spacer bracket onto the mounting plate and secure with the 8 32 x 1 2 inch shoulder screws The spacer bracket is not shown in the figure but is installed behind the top power distribution unit Slide the keyhole slots in the power distribution unit over the shoulder screws Insert the 8 32 x 1 inch screw through the distribution unit through the spacer bracket and into the plate The mounting hol
161. eceptacle 1 Provide one receptacle per media gateway 2 Verify that the circuit breakers are OFF 3 Plugthe media gateway AC power cord into the AC power receptacle on the rear of each media gateway 4 Plug the opposite end of each AC power cord into the appropriate AC power receptacle in the equipment room gt NOTE Loop the excess cord and tie wrap it to the back cover to prevent accidental unplugging Connect Time Division Multiplexing Bus Cables 1 Locate the white fabric covered Time Division Multiplexing TDM bus cable on the rear of the media gateways 2 Remove the TDM Bus Terminator from Slot 18 of the expansion control media gateway A J58890N and move it to Slot 17 on port media gateway B J58890H See Connections for Media Gateway Stacks on page 120 3 Connectthe supplied TDM Bus Cables WP 91716 L3 as shown 4 Repeatfor each port media gateway in the stack October 2002 120 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Connections for Media Gateway Stacks Figure notes 1 2 3 4 9 AY 1 oh 9 M ES ES Ent o NW 5 ES ES Eat o J
162. eck against the Software Release Letter that comes with the software CD October 2002 31 Configure Media Server 1 If the software version resident on the server is equivalent to the required version the server will not require a software upgrade during initial installation If the software version resident on the server is older than the required version you must upgrade the software on the S8700 Media Server Set Date and Time The following administration uses the services laptop computer connected to media server 1 and uses the media server Web interface 1 Under Server click Set Server Time Timezone to set the current time date and time zone settings 2 Click Submit Set media server configuration type When a server is first initialized and configured it is necessary to set the configuration type IP Connect or Multi Connect Refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S8700 Media Server for the proper configuration type information 1 Under Server Configuration and Upgrades click Configure Server to open the first page of the Configure Server process gt NOTE For help with any of the Web pages click About This Screen on the Web page or Help at the top of the main menu October 2002 32 Configure Media Server 1 2 Select Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect configuration and click Configure Server Progress Review Notices Copy Settings Set Identities Co
163. ed network information in hand Refer to the Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S8700 Media Server for the list of required network information Verify that you have all the equipment on site Refer to thePre Installation Information S8700 Media Server for the list of required hardware Verify that the services laptop has the right hardware and software Refer to the Pre Installation Information S8700 Media Server for the list of computer specifications Verify that you have the required tools on site Refer to the Installation Tool Information S8 amp 700 Multi Connect for the list of required tools Verify that you have current translations available for download via ProVision Verify that you have the current software firmware and required patches This is not the software firmware and any patches that are pre loaded on the 8700 Media Server but what will be upgraded to after installation Verify that you have the appropriate logins and passwords to access the 8700 Media Servers and server complex components Refer to tha Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S8700 Media Server PDF for a list of required logins October 2002 20 Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server with Avaya MCC1 or SCC1 Media Gateways Pre installation Setup October 2002 21 High level overview of installation process High level overview of installation process The installation process is completed in
164. ed to be separated The connectivity for this arrangement will be custom engineered For an overview of separated servers please see the job aid Server Separation Avaya 8700 Media Server Configure Media Server 2 You have 2 options for configuring media server 2 by copying the settings from media server 1 or configuring media server2 as you configured media server 1 If you choose to copy the settings both media servers must be on the same software release and load This section covers the following tasks e Verify Software Version on page 44 e Set server configuration type on page 45 e Continue server 2 configuration on page 46 e Verify Media Server 2 Connection to Customer s LAN if provided on page 47 e Test Media Server 2 LEDs on page 48 e Busy Out Standby Media Server on page 49 The following administration uses the services laptop computer connected to media server 2 and uses the media server Web interface gt NOTE Make sure you have the complete list of IP addresses and host names before starting this process Refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms 586700 Media Server October 2002 44 Configure Media Server 2 gt NOTE Make sure your networking and Web browser settings are correct Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information 8S8700 Media Server 1 Plug media server 2 into UPS 2 to power it up Refe
165. edia gateway may contain from 1 to 5 port networks PNs gt NOTE Before you begin the media gateway installation check the location of the AC DC power receptacles The receptacles must be on separately fused circuits not controlled by wall switches They must be located within 10 feet 3 meters of the gateway and outside the Main Distribution Frame MDF area This section covers the following procedures Installing an Avaya MCCI Media Gateway on page 64 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack on page 99 Installing the Avaya G700 Media Gateway on page 139 Install the Stratum 3 clock on page 129 October 2002 64 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway This section describes how to install Avaya MCC1 Media Gateways Figure on page 64 shows a typical Avaya MCCI Media Gateway Typical Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway M Icdfpdui KLC 031202 Port Carrier C Port Carrier B Expansion Control Carrier A Fans Port Carrier D Port Carrier E Oo 0 F WO I Global Power Supply October 2002 65 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Perform these tasks before you begin the installation e Unpack and Inspect Media Gateway on page 65 e Unpack and Inspect Auxiliary Cabinet on page 66
166. edia gateways are close together the signal may go through a single directly connected fiber optic cable If the media gateways are far apart it may be easier to connect the media gateways through an LIU or fiber shelf For each fiber indicated in the fiber optic Cable Running List 1 Install a lightwave transceiver on the media gateway connector at the position in the FROM column in the running list 2 Selectacable indicated by the CABLE CODE and LENGTH in the running list Connect 1 of the fibers to each connector on the lightwave transceivers just installed The fiber is numbered 1 or 2 The connector on the transceiver is labeled TX or RX Keep track of which fiber connects to which transceiver connector Label both ends of these cables 3 Route the fiber optic cables from the transceiver out of the media gateway Secure the cables to the cable tie rack Keep the fiber optic cables clear of the heavier I O cables 4 Ifthe media gateway in the TO column in the running list is located remotely from the FROM media gateway connect to the TO media gateway by way of the LIU 5 Install a lightwave transceiver on the media gateway connector at the position in the TO column in the running list 6 Route the cables from the FROM media gateway down into the cable trays of each PN media gateway Connect the cables to the lightwave transceiver just installed on the TO media gateway 7 Connect the fiber that comes from the TX connector of the FROM
167. edure The LEDs flash at regular intervals after the self test procedure is completed successfully Power up DC input optional The P333T PWR switch can operate on the AC input only However you may wish to use the optional DC input for the following Backup for the power over Ethernet ports To provide more than 200 watts for the power over Ethernet ports gt NOTE Please refer to the P333T PWR switch User s Guide for more information Connect the Cables Connect IP telephones PCs servers routers workstations and hubs 1 Connect the Ethernet connection cable not supplied to a 10 100 megabits per second port on the front panel of the Avaya P333T PWR switch gt NOTE Use standard RJ45 connections and a CATS cable for 100 megabits per second operation 2 Connectthe other end of the cable to the Ethernet port of the PC server router workstation IP telephone switch or hub gt NOTE Use a crossover cable when connecting the Avaya P333T PWR switch to a switch or hub October 2002 292 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies 3 Check that the appropriate link LNK LEDs light up October 2002 293 Completing the Installation Administration Completing the Installation Administration This section covers the following tasks e Verify translations on page 293 e View alarms on page 293 e Upgrade the IPSI firmware if necessary on page 294 Enable and disable
168. equipment Also realize that if such an intrusion should occur it could result in a variety of losses to your company including but not limited to human data pri vacy intellectual property material assets financial resources labor costs and or legal costs Responsibility for Your Company s Telecommunications Security The final responsibility for securing both this system and its net worked equipment rests with you Avaya s customer system adminis trator your telecommunications peers and your managers Base the fulfillment of your responsibility on acquired knowledge and resources from a variety of sources including but not limited to Installation documents System administration documents Security documents Hardware software based security tools Shared information between you and your peers Telecommunications security experts To prevent intrusions to your telecommunications equipment you and your peers should carefully program and configure Your Avaya provided telecommunications systems and their interfaces Your Avaya provided software applications as well as their underlying hardware software platforms and interfaces Any other equipment networked to your Avaya products Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP If the equipment supports Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP facili ties you may experience certain compromises in performance reli ability and security even when the equipment pe
169. er Yellow means the battery is being charged After the battery reaches full charge maximum of 20 hours the yellow LED should go out FAIL If either green or yellow LED is not lit after powering up check the connections Test the AC outlet If power is available and the AC power cord and connections are good replace the power unit 4 Disconnect the AC plug on the power supply this activates the DC supply 5 Check DC battery back up operation of the 1145B2 Power Supply by monitoring the LEDs PASS The red and green LEDs should be lit together Red means the power supply is on battery back up FAIL If either green or red LED is not lit after disconnecting AC power check the connections If the connections are good replace the power unit or batteries 6 Reconnect AC power to the power supply Wire the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit Wire endpoints to the 1146B2 while power from the 1145B2 is on A red LED lights if its associated circuit is connected to shorted wiring or to a shorted telephone October 2002 286 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies 1 Install cross connect jumpers to wire from the unit the label shows polarity to Pins 7 and 8 of the appropriate information outlet Route the wires through the clip provided on the unit If a red LED is on see Reset LEDs on Power Distribution Unit on page 286 See Typical Wiring to a Telephone on page 286 2 Mark lead destinations on the label
170. er 2002 33 Configure Media Server 1 Continue Server 1 configuration 1 Under Server Configuration and Upgrades click Configure Server to restart the configure server process If a software upgrade was not performed continue on with the next step 2 Click through the Review Notices to get to the Select method for configuring server page Configure Server Progress Select method for configuring server Review Notices Copy Settings Set Identities Configure Interfaces NOTE The duplication link must be connected and the interface up on the duplicated server Configure LSP Copy from duplicated server can only be done if you have already configured the duplicated server using the same software version as this server Configure Switches Configure all services using the wizard Set DNS DHCP C Configure individual services Set Static Routes C Copy configuration information from the duplicated server Configure Time Server This is server number 1 Set Modem Interface Update System Iv The Corporate LAN interface of both servers is on the same subnet Click CONTINUE to proceed About This Screen October 2002 34 Configure Media Server 1 3 Select Configure all services using the wizard and click Continue to get to the Set October 2002 Configure Media Server 1 Server Identities page Configure Server Set Server Identities Server names must be unique Host Name serverl SY Host Name server2 NE
171. er to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information S8700 Media Server Make sure you are using the correct IP address 192 11 13 6 and port 5023 Make sure you are using the correct login and password Make sure in the LAN security settings that output from server for icmp is checked Make sure in the LAN security settings that input to server for icmp is checked October 2002 Problem 333 Troubleshooting an Installation Solution Can t access media server remotely LED display on IPSI is flashing Can t access IPSI for static addressing No V on IPSI LED V on IPSI LED is not filled in Get Anonymous memory message when placing flashcard into PCMCIA drive Make sure in the LAN security settings that input to server is checked for telnet https Web access and def sat Avaya Site Adminstration access The LAN settings can be changed on the Web interface with a direct connection to the media server IPSI LED has not been programmed with switch and location DHCP IPSI LED has not had an IP address assigned to it static IP addressing Make sure you are plugged into the Services top port Make sure the ARP cache is cleared In an MS DOS window type arp d 192 11 13 6 and press Enter IPSI is not connected to Ethernet switch or network Connect cable to bottom port on IPSI faceplate and to the Ethernet switch Make sure port on Ethernet switch assigned to tha
172. erature areas Batteries stored in a cold environment should be protected from condensation during storage and warming Batteries should be stabilized at room temperature prior to use after cold storage Do not install batteries if the manufacturing date on the label indicates that the batteries are more than six months old Mounting the 1145B2 1146B2 Power Supply 1145B2 1146B2 Mounting Arrangement on page 281 shows how the standard power supply and wall mounting plates fit together Expanded Power Distribution Unit on page 282 shows the expanded power supply components power distribution unit and T cable A manual switch on the distribution unit allows the user to redirect reserve power to outputs 1 through 32 so all outputs are provided battery reserve power or to outputs 1 through 8 to provide high power above 6 25 watts gt NOTE The switch must be set to the 1 32 position The 1145B22 1146B2 is a 48 V power supply with 275 watts total output Each output circuit is current limited by a Polymer Positive Temperature Coefficient Resistance Device PTC that limits the maximum output to 12 watts Each 1146B2 output has an LED to indicate the status of the PTC If the LED is on the PTC has a short on that power pair Not all outputs can simultaneously provide 12 watts The average power per output cannot exceed 8 6 watts 275 32 8 6 The 1145B22 is designed to power one ISDN terminal or DCP adjunct per output The ma
173. erver Customizing the Active Media Server Use Avaya Site Administration to administer the media server using the Multi Vantage software If you do not have Avaya Site Administration 1 11 on your computer or laptop you must download it from the media server and install it gt NOTE You must use Avaya Site Administration 1 11 or higher to be able to administer new features in Release 1 1 or higher Avaya MultiVantage Software List of Tasks e Set up Avaya Site Administration on page 57 e Starting Avaya Site Administration on page 58 Input Translations on page 59 Reset Media Server on page 59 e Add Media Gateways on page 59 e Administer and Enable the IP Media Server Interface on page 60 e Add IPSI Translations to Multi Vantage Software on page 61 Set up Avaya Site Administration You can set up Avaya Site Administration one of two ways e Directly through a dedicated services port on page 57 e Remotely over the network on page 58 Directly through a dedicated services port The following administration is done on a computer used to access the active media server 1 Plug the services laptop into the dedicated services port default is 2 Eth1 on the back of the active media server 2 Under Telephony Administration click Download ASA to download Avaya Site Administration 1 11 to your computer 3 Follow the steps in the Set
174. es in terminating equipment 1 o a fF Ww Cut a 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire long enough to reach from the 8700 Multi Connect configuration s single point ground block or DC power media gateway Ground Discharge Bar to the MDF CBC block Connect one end of the 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire to the single point ground block or Ground Discharge Bar Route the wire next to the 25 pair cables connecting to the trunk auxiliary purple field Tie wrap the 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire to the 25 pair cables Connect the 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire to the MDF CBC ground block Repeat the above steps for each CBC ground wire installed October 2002 192 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Coupled Bonding Conductor Figure notes 1 25 Pair Tip amp Ring Cables to Media Gateways Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC Terminal Block Tie Wraps Cable Shield or Six Spare Pairs Ground on Carbon Block Protector or Equivalent Trunk Cable to Network Interface 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm Wire 10 11 12 13 14 cbc gnd 1 PDH 062696 To Network Media Gateways Battery Plant Ground Discharge Bar for Single Point Ground Cross Connect Ground Block Main Distribution Frame MDF To Other Cross Connect Ground Blocks Approved Ground Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC October 2002 193 Connect the Hardware Connect the Hardware This section covers the following tasks Connect the
175. es the reference IPSI e Access to the RFA Information page for these items if not already installed on your PC Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher installed on the services laptop Intranet access to your designated RFA portal See URL list below Go to the RFA Web site The RFA website automates some of the installation procedures including generating license and Avaya authentication files 1 At your laptop PC browser go to the appropriate website Avaya Associates http associate2 avaya com sales market services and select DEFINITY REMOTE FEATURE ACTIVATION http services avaya com and select Remote Feature Activation RFA which is listed below Strategy amp Operations Re Engineering Business Partners go to the appropriate regional Business Partner portal United States http www avaya com businesspartner Canada https www avaya ca BusinessPartner Brazil http www avaya com br Home asp Caribbean and Latin America https cala businesspartner avaya com Europe Middle East Asia https emea businesspartner avaya com APAC http www avaya apac com bp e Contractors go to http www avaya com services rfa If you are unable to access RFA using your recommended portal try http rfa avaya com 2 Using your SSO log into the RFA website 3 Click Start RFA Application 4 Complete the information necessary to create and deliver license and Avaya
176. et 4 Click CONTINUE to proceed Continue About This Screen gt NOTE Most of the fields are populated with default settings Do not change the defaults unless the customer s network administrator requests it refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms 8568700 Media Server 4 Fill in the fields on this and the subsequent pages e Configure Interfaces e Configure LSP e Configure Switches Set DNS DHCP e Set Static Routes October 2002 37 Configure Media Server 1 Configure Time Server e Set Modem Interface Update System gt NOTE The media server is not configured until you click Continue on the Update System page 5 When you get to the Configure Local Survivable Processor page select This is NOT a local survivable processor default setting and click Continue 6 When you complete all the fields click Continue on the Update System screen The Update System screen displays each configuration task as it completes it The last line says System modifications completed Install License and Avaya Authentication Files Installing the license and Avaya authentication files is a 2 step process 1 Copy license and Avaya authentication files from laptop to media server 1 on page 37 2 Install the license and Avaya authentication files on page 38 Copy license and Avaya authentication files from laptop to media server 1 The following administration uses the
177. existing protection system A sneak current protector is always required when a 3 type primary protector is used Telephone Restrictions for Exposed Environments Analog telephones connected to TN746B Analog Line circuit packs cannot be installed in an exposed environment Digital Out of Building Telephone Protection Digital out of building telephones require protection at both building entrances The 4C3S 75 Enhanced Protector and the ITW Linx Enhanced Protector can be used to protect digital telephones and digital line circuit packs These units provide primary and sneak current protection The 4C3S 75 is equipped with a heat coil for sneak current protection and the ITW Linx is equipped with replaceable fuses for sneak current protection gt NOTE The TN2181 16 port 2 wire digital line circuit pack may not be approved for some out of building uses Contact your Avaya representative for more information The 4C3S 75 may be used only with TN754B circuit packs circuit packs Digital Voice Circuit Protectors on page 265 lists the approved protectors When possible all new and reused wiring installations should use blocks that accept the standard 5 pin plug in 4C3S 75 protector However there are reused wiring installations where this may not be cost effective For these installations the ITW Linx protector may be installed October 2002 265 Installing and Wiring Telephones An example of this is where screw type
178. f the defaults are left administered this could create a serious security issue For example the default Set community name string with it s widely known value of Private could be used to shutdown power to the UPS loads via SNMP message Refer to the configuration section of the user guide that comes with the SNMP module for the default user ID and password and the administration commands Use the following general procedures to administer the SNMP modules October 2002 52 Configure the UPSs gt NOTE These steps are specifically for the Powerware 9125 UPS equipped with a ConnectUPS M MX SNMP module These steps use the default addresses and subnet masks for the 58700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration If other addresses are to be used they must be substituted when performing these steps Refer to the filled out Job Aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms 8700 Media Server for the proper data 1 Connectthe services laptop computer RS 232 serial port to the DB 9 connector on the back of the ConnectUPS MX module for UPS 1 Use a DB 9 to DB 9 serial cable supplied with the ConnectUPSTM MX SNMP module gt NOTE Avaya Terminal Emulation and HyperTerminal are supported terminal emulation programs Terranova is not supported 2 Open a terminal emulation program such as Avaya Terminal Emulation on the services laptop 3 Administer the emulation program port settings e 9600 bps rate No parity e
179. figuration check the AC power using a KS 20599 digital voltmeter DVM or equivalent 1 Set the DVM to the 250 volt range 2 Carefully measure the voltage between the hot and neutral side of the receptacle The neutral wire is white the hot wire is black 3 Verify the meter reads 106 to 128 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 4 Measure the voltage between the neutral and ground side of the receptacle The ground wire is green Verify the meter reads 0 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 6 Setall cabinet power modules OFF Plug the AC power cable into the receptacle Connect DC Power and Ground to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet Provide power for the clock cabinet from the same DC power plant as the 58700 Media Server for Multi connect configuration Ground the clock cabinet to the DC power plant October 2002 131 Install the Stratum 3 clock Connect Clock Cabinet Grounding 1 Measure and cut a 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire long enough to reach from the clock cabinet to the ground discharge bar in the DC power plant 2 Insert 1 end of the wire into the ground lug on the clock cabinet and tighten the screw 3 Attach the lug to the receptacle cover Be sure the lug and cabinet ground wires connect to separate screws on the receptacle cover 4 Route the ground wire to the DC power plant and connect to DISCH GRD inside the cabinet Connect Stratum 3 Clock DC Power 1 Set the clo
180. formation Outlet 4 Pair Circuit DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire October 2002 167 Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room 4 Pair Run to Equipment Room or Satellite Location 9 9 gt 9 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 5 Station Side of MDF or Satellite Location 4 Pair Circuit Blue Field DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire Information Outlet fA 1764798a CJL 030796 4 Pair Run to Equipment Room or Satellite Location Figure notes o a fF WO N Part of MDF 3 Pair Connecting Blocks 4 Pair Connecting Blocks Purple Field Patch Cord or Cross Connect Jumpers Blue Field 10 11 Alo 1758532a CJL 031196 To Media Gateway 3 pair modularity A25D Cable 258A or BR2580A Adapter Information Outlet 4 Pair Circuit DIW station cable D Inside Wire October 2002 168 Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room 3 Pair to 4 Pair Satellite Location Connectivity 9 9 9 Figure notes o a fF WO N N Part of MDF 3 Pair Connecting Blocks Purple Field White Field Patch Cord or Cross Connect Jumpers To Media Gateway 3 Pair Modularity A25D Cable 3 Pair Circuits B25A Cable 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Connectorized staggered finger Multiple 25 Pair Cable 4 Pair Connecting Blocks Blue Field 258A or BR2580A Adapter Information Outlet 4 Pair Circuit DIW Station Cable D Inside Wire
181. formation and check the connectivity including the cabling October 2002 221 Connecting to the Customer s Network 1 Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of the TN799DP and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack eino ip address 192 168 10 21 OX PING RESULTS End pt IP Port Port Type Result Time ms Error Code 192 168 10 21 01A13 MEDPRO PASS 10 1124 Ne Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of the customer s gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack N 3 Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of another computer beyond the gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack The TN799DP C LAN circuit pack is now installed in the media gateway and connected to the IP network October 2002 222 Connecting to the Customer s Network The TN2302AP IP Media Processor The TN2302AP IP Media Processor provides on interface between a customer s IP network and Avaya media gateways This interface is used to transport voice and FAX between the media gateways and IP devices such as H 323 V2 compliant endpoints and other Avaya telephone systems Each TN2302AP can support between 32 and
182. ge 287 For installation instructions see Connect the 1151A1 or 1151A2 Power Supplies on page 288 gt NOTE The 1151B1 and 1151B2 power supplies replace the 1151A1 and 1151A2 power supplies Important Safety Instructions for 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies Please read the following helpful tips Retain these tips for later use When using this power supply the following safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on this power supply This product can be hazardous if immersed in water To avoid the possibility of electrical shock do not use it near water To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product except to replace the battery This product should be operated only from the type of AC power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of the type of AC power being provided contact a qualified service person Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it October 2002 288 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of line or electric shock e Disconnect the cords on this product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following co
183. ge for each Port Network PN 1 Type status port network number 1 64 and press Enter This displays the standby expansion link See Sample of Port Network Status before Expansion Link is Set 88700 Multi Connect Type set expansion link UUCSS where UUCSS is one of the cabinet carrier and port locations of the standby expansion link and press Enter Verify the bottom of the screen displays Command successfully completed Type status port network number 1 64 and press Enter A screen similar to Sample of Port Network Status after Expansion Link is Set S8700 Multi Connect displays Verify that the MODEs of the expansion links have changed If any problems are indicated check the TDM cables and the inter cabinet cables ICC in the associated port network October 2002 312 Testing the Complete Configuration Sample of Port Network Status before Expansion Link is Set S8700 Multi Connect status port network b PORT NETWORK STATUS Major Minor Warning Carrier PNC Status ATM PNC PN Alarms Alarms Alarms Locs Active Standby Conn Endpoints Mode 1 0 1 19 01A up 2 A PNC 01D01 AT0O2A active 01B 1 A PNC 01C01 ATOI1A active 01C 01D TDM Service Control Dedicated TONE Service System System Bus State Channel Tones CLOCK State Clock Tones A in n n 01A in standby standby B in y y 01B in active active Service Major Minor Bus Open Bus PKT State Alarms Alarms Faults Leads 1 in n n 0 0 m
184. gn the mounting holes in the rear ground plate over the bottom screws in the top media gateway See Rear Ground Plate and Front Plate or Media Gateway Clip Side View on page 124 Align the mounting holes in the ground plate with the four holes at the top of the media gateway below the top media gateway Slide the mounting plate down to seat on the Screws Check all Time Division Multiplexing TDM bus cables and the Inter Cabinet Cables ICC to be sure they are not pinched by the plates Repeat Steps 1 3 until the rear ground plates are installed between all stacked media gateways Do not tighten the screws yet Rear Panel Screw Locations SSS Mt AU NN Mi grnd plt CJL 030696 Figure notes 1 Expansion Control Media Gateway A No ground plate is installed on an un stacked media gateway Rear Ground Plate attached between stacked media gateways Port Media Gateway B Screws to Loosen October 2002 124 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Rear Ground Plate and Front Plate or Media Gateway Clip Side View grdpltec LJK 031096 Figure notes 1 Front Ground Plate or Media Gateway Clip 2 Battery 3 Rear Ground Plate Install Front Ground Plates Media Gateways with Radiation Shielding and Earthquake Protection Ground plates are installed between stacked media gateways
185. gnore the indicators until you can conveniently replace the media server The LEDs on the back of the media server There are 2 sets of LEDs on the back of the media server 1 set for the 4 port NIC card and 1 set for the fiber optic cable used for memory shadowing The GREEN LEDs to the right of the NIC October 2002 321 Testing the Complete Configuration ports light up when they are in use The GREEN LEDs to the right of the fiber optic cable indicate that the cables are connected correctly Avaya Ethernet Switch LEDs The Avaya Ethernet Switch P333T has the LEDs shown in LEDs on Avaya P333T Ethernet switch on page 321 LEDs on Avaya P333T Ethernet switch 56 57 58 n e e e e e e 62 64 65 66 13 51 52 C EXPANSION e e SLOT e e een een een eon e oo eon een e ec eo m E a zi o Y E o m o e eee FIV LNK COL Tx Rx FDX FC Hspd LAG ledi333t KLC 030602 Figure notes 1 Ports in use 3 Power 2 CPU boot status 4 Lights if this module is the Avaya P33x stack master agent For descriptions of the other LEDs refer to the quick start guide and user guide that comes with the model of Avaya Ethernet switch you have UPS LEDs The Powerware front panel has the LEDs shown in LEDs on Powerware 9125 UPS October 2002 322 Testing the Complete Configuration LEDs on Powerware 9125 UPS e01 I
186. gory 5 crossover cable with an RJ45 connector on each end Plug one end of the CAT5 cable into the services access port which defaults to port 2 Eth1 on the back of media server and the other end into the network connector NIC card on your computer You may need a network interface card NIC adapter The network connection for the computer is as follows P address 192 11 13 5 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 252 Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information S8700 Media Server for the list of computer hardware and software specifications October 2002 300 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Services laptop computer connected directly to the media server 1 oo ooj oo oo ee A So o0 99 oo o oo p ERRI 9 BP pig oo OO oo ooo 0000 000000 000000000 00000000 e cadlsrvr KLC 030402 Figure notes 1 Services laptop 3 NIC adapter cable if necessary 2 PCMCIA Network Interface Card NIC 4 Black CATS5 crossover cable Once connected you can administer the media server using these tools Media server Web interface for server specific administration Linux shell interface for server specific administration e Avaya Site Administration for Avaya Multi Vantage software commands usable on the active media
187. h a label identifying it as such The labels are provided with the unit Check for normal operation as follows Place the test switch switch 12 in NORMAL OPERATION Ensure the power supply is providing 48 VDC at 80 mA maximum The power LED should be ON e Check wiring connections e Verify there is dial tone on all emergency transfer sets If all of the above conditions are not met remove the panel from service and replace it with a new panel Check for transfer operation as follows Place the test switch switch 12 in the ACTIVATED position The power LED should be OFF e Verify there is dial tone on all emergency transfer sets If all of the above conditions are not met remove the panel from service and replace it with a new panel Trunk Test Switches Switch Number Circuit Number o uy QV tn A UU N T RB BN o AI LO esa October 2002 Trunk Test Switches Continued Switch Number Circuit Number 9 5 10 5 11 Not Used 12 Test Switch Pin Assignments for 25 Pair Connector 26 W BL TTC1 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 1 1 BL W RTCI Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 1 27 W O TTKI Tip CO Trunk Circuit 1 2 O W RTK1 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 1 28 W G TLCI Tip PBX Line Port 1 3 G W RLCI Ring PBX Line Port 1 29 W BR TSTI Tip Emergency Terminal 1 4 BR W RSTI Ring Emergency Terminal 1 30 W S TTC2 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 2 5 S W RTC2 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 2 31 R BL TTK2 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 2 6 BL R RTK2
188. he 48V and GRD terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block to the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal See Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension on page 274 Connect CO trunk leads from the purple field to TC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk Connect CO trunk leads from the green field to TK terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk Connect telephone leads from the purple analog line circuit pack row connecting block to the LC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each telephone Connect ST leads on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each emergency transfer telephone to the assigned terminal in the blue or white station distribution field Install the telephone Connect telephone to the information outlet Install patch cords jumper wires between the media gateway side and the station October 2002 275 Installing and Wiring Telephones Install External Ringing Connections for external ringing are at an information outlet The media gateway side of the Main Distribution Frame MDF is connected to a TN2183 or equivalent Analog Line circuit pack The circuitry and power source for the device are provided by the customer gt NOTE A maximum of 3 devices can connect to 1 analog line circuit pack port 1 Wire the ringing de
189. he first terminal block of the trunk auxiliary field 2 Placethe next cable slack manager beside the previously installed unit Align the tabs and interlocks and snap the units together 3 Repeat Step 2 until all cable slack managers are installed gt NOTE Nine 1 4 in holes 0 63 cm are provided in a cable slack manager base if earthquake mounting is required If a base is mounted on an uneven floor shims may be required for leveling and to assure proper fit of the covers Holes are provided in the sides of the base for bolting cable slack manager together Bolts and shims must be obtained locally 4 The S8700 Multi Connect configuration cables will route through the cable slack manager as shown Complete cable routing is covered later in this chapter Cable clamps are required in installations with cable slack managers At the rear of the media gateways install 2 cable clamps using the screws provided These clamps hold the 25 pair input output or MDF cables in place Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager MCC on page 187 and Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager SCC on page 188 show cable clamp placement and cable routing Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager MCC ae q cbdffir CJL 102396 Figure notes 1 Top of Media Gateway 4 Spare Center Troughs 2 Cable Slack Manager 5 Media Gateway Trough for 3 Cable Clamp Port Cables October 2002 188 Patch Cord J
190. he mounting screws and tighten the screws securely Install a locally obtained 12 x 3 4 inch screw into the top two mounting slots and tighten securely Repeat the procedure for each sneak fuse panel Secure the B25A cable to the panel with the captive screw on the connector and a supplied cable tie Model 507B Sneak Fuse Panel Sneak Current Protector 507B sneak CJL 032096 Figure notes 1 2 3 Sneak Fuse Panel 4 220029 Fuses Inside Panel Use 95 Pair Male Connector in small screwdriver to pry top cover off 25 Pair Female Connector Out Sneak Fuse Connector Pinout Connector Pin Numbers Pair Fuse Number 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 1 nan A WwW N October 2002 190 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Sneak Fuse Connector Pinout Pair Fuse Number Connector Pin Numbers 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 34 50 25 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 October 2002 191 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Install Coupled Bonding Conductor The Coupled Bonding Conductor on page 192 CBC connects to the single point ground block and runs adjacent to pairs in an associated telecommunications cable The mutual coupling between the bonding conductor and the pairs reduces potential differenc
191. he purple field for 1 pair Central Office CO trunks or in 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 3 Pair Tie Trunks on page 181 for 3 pair tie trunks 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 1 Pair Trunks 9 12345678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 9 1 4 7 1013 16 19 22 4 7 1013 16 19 22 9 9 1758425b MMR 031496 Figure notes 1 Green Field 3 Pairs 2 l Pair Jumpers 4 Purple Field October 2002 181 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration 3 Pair Modularity for Trunk Pairs for 3 Pair Tie Trunks 9 9 123 45 6 7 8 9 101112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12345267 8 9 101112 9 123 45 6 7 8 9 101112 9 1758537b MMR 031496 Figure notes Green Field 3 Pairs 1 Pair Jumpers 4 Purple Field Install Cables Between Media Gateway and MDF 1 Install D rings on the wall between the cable slack manager and the terminal connecting blocks mounted on the MDF Install a self adhesive port label on the back of each connector on the connector cable Position the labels so the media gateway connector retainers do not cover them At the rear of the media gateway connect 1 end of the connector cable to the assigned connector Route the cable down the rear of the media gateway through the cable slack manager and to the M
192. hree characters of the LED display A V will be shown in the fourth character bottom of the display When an address has been assigned to the IPSI by the DHCP server the center of the V will be filled in to form the bottom half of a diamond in the display W CLK C fpdiled2 LJK 022502 S E R Zu 7 For high or critical reliability configuration repeat steps 1 through 6 for the IPSI in carrier B 8 Press excess ribbon against the circuit packs Using static addressing For the IPSI circuit packs to get static IP addresses you must administer them directly through the Ethernet port connection on the IPSI faceplate top port See Connecting directly to the IPST on page 209 October 2002 Connect the Hardware Connecting directly to the IPSI O O O cKO M La cadlipsi KLC 031502 Lil Ll Figure notes 1 Services laptop 3 NIC adapter cable if necessary 2 PCMCIA Network Interface Card NIC 4 CATS crossover cable to IPSI 1 Connect the services laptop computer to the top port on the IPSI circuit pack faceplate 2 Click Start gt Run to open the Run dialog box services laptop 3 Type command and press Enter to open a MSDOS Command Line window 4 Type arp d 192 11 13 6 and press Enter to clear the ARP cache in the laptop This command will respond with one of the following The comman
193. iVantage Software gt NOTE The information you provide differs depending whether the IPSIs get static addresses or they are assigned automatically through DHCP 1 Type add ipserver interface PNnumber and press Enter to add the IPSI circuit pack information October 2002 62 Customizing the Active Media Server 2 When using a DHCP server verify that the fields associated with the Primary IPSI and Secondary IPSI if equipped are populated with default data The Host and DHCP ID fields are set by the DHCP server faa ipserver interface 4 Page ef 1 D IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI ADMINISTRATION PORT NETWORK 4 Enable QoS n Primary IPSI Location 4AXX Host ipsi A04a DHCP ID ipsi A04a Secondary IPSI Location 4B01 Host ipsi A04b DHCP ID ipsi A04b S D 3 Verify that all the other fields are populated 4 Repeatsteps 1 and 2 for each IPSI 5 Type save translations and press Enter to save the IPSI translations to the hard drive October 2002 63 Install the Media Gateways Install the Media Gateways Floor plans and equipment layouts for typical S8700 Multi Connect configuration installations are provided in Designing the Avaya 8700 Media Server for Multi Connect Configuration Media gateways are typically installed in the same equipment room as the Avaya S8700 Media Server rack hardware however the media gateways can be installed in another location including another state or country A m
194. ia Gateway Figure notes a A o N o 8700 Media Servers Ethernet switch UPS units one for each media server MCCI Media Gateway Dedicated LAN connectivity to IPSI circuit pack in the MCC1 Media Gateway IP telephones off the customer s network Voice mail connected via IP cydcrbro KLC 080202 10 11 G700 Media Gateway connected via the LAN to the TN799DP C LAN board located in the MCCI Media Gateway DCP phones Avaya multifunction digital telephones Analog connectivity analog telephones lines and trunks Ethernet switch optional October 2002 141 Cabling Media Gateways Cabling Media Gateways This section provides both information about installing the telecommunications cabling and procedures for doing the installation Information about Installing the Cabling e Provisioning Plan on page 143 e Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware on page 144 e MDF Cross Connect Fields on page 147 e Main Distribution Frame on page 148 e Main Distribution Frame Labels on page 150 e Off Premises Circuit Protection on page 151 e Cable Installation on page 153 e Sneak Fuse Panels on page 152 e Coupled Bonding Conductor on page 158 e Installation Space Requirements on page 159 for the sneak fuse panels the 110 type hardware and the Cab
195. ia Gateway Remote Power Off Cable Connections Part 2 To Carriers Ato E Battery Cabinet p 1 Terminal TB1 4 RPO Cable Bar 16 Auxiliary Contacts in EPO Switch 0026_3 RBP 080196 Connect External Alarm Cable 1 Plug the external alarm cable into the connector shown in External Alarm Cable Connection on page 93 2 Route the opposite end of the cable to the MDE The alarm cable is connected to the MDF later External Alarm Cable Connection Carrier circuit breakers Connect RPO cable here J21 Connect external NV NV alarm cable here J18 d AKT Pin 6 RPO Pin 2 RPO External psdf002 CJL 081596 alarm cable October 2002 94 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Check Commercial Power and Connect AC Power Before powering up the 8700 Multi Connect configuration check the AC power using a KS 20599 digital voltmeter DVM or equivalent 1 Set the DVM to the 250 volt range 2 Carefully measure the voltage between the hot and neutral side of the receptacle The neutral wire is white the hot wire is black 3 Verify the meter reads 106 to 128 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 4 Measure the voltage between the neutral and ground side of the receptacle The ground wire is green Verify the meter reads 0 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 6 Setall media gateway po
196. ia server Web interface for media server specific administration and call processing features October 2002 302 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Avaya Site Administration for the MultiVantage Software usable on the active media server only Acommand line interface via a Telnet window for Linux shell commands If you have problems accessing the media server remotely Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Remotely over a Modem gt NOTE Remote access over a modem is for Avaya services support access only and not for routine administration Because the media server uses the same line to report alarms it cannot report new alarms while the line is in use Setting up a dial up connection To use a computer modem you must first set it up through your dial up connection 1 Launch the dial up connection program which varies depending on your operating system You can access them generally through My Computer or Control Panel folders Refer to your computer s help system for specific information 2 Double click Make New Connection to open the New Connection wizard 3 Within the wizard and depending on your operating system you may be asked to e Assign a name to the connection Select dial up to the network for the network connection type Select the modem you will be using for the dial up connection Type in the appropriate telephone number to access the active server Refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pr
197. ication MultiVantage restarted Retry 1 New Pid 13304 p WD 2 MIN N Mon Aug 19 11 25 20 2002 Application MultiV antage 1942 terminated Clear Clear All About This Screen 2 Resolve all alarms not involving the busied out standby server Refer to the maintenance documentation for information on how to resolve alarms Upgrade the IPSI firmware if necessary The following administration is done on a computer used to access the active media server using the media server Web interface You may need to upgrade the firmware on some or all the IPSIs Each IPSI must be on the same firmware load 1 Click View IPSI Version and select Query All Verify that all the IPSI circuit packs have the same and most uptodate IPSI firmware 2 Ifthe firmware needs to be updated on any of the IPSI circuit packs refer to the Upgrading section for information on downloading and upgrading the IPSI firmware Enable and disable Ethernet switch ports The following administration is done on the services laptop computer connected to the active media server using the S8700 Media Server Web Interface October 2002 295 Completing the Installation Administration 1 Under Miscellaneous click Enable Disable Ethernet Switch Ports to enable the Ethernet ports being used and to disable the unused Ethernet ports Ethernet Switch Port Administration Select a Switch to Administer Control Network A Switch 1 C Control
198. ification 323 analog line circuit protectors 263 analog station wiring 243 analog telephones 261 analog tie trunk wiring 244 announcement playback procedure 315 announcements deleting 315 recording 315 testing 314 ASA installing 303 launching 58 ASG turning on 23 attendant console 254 maximum cabling distance 241 attendant console LEDs 318 322 attendant console cabling distances 254 attendant console installing 256 attendant console testing 313 auxiliary cabinet equipment 68 auxiliary cabinet cabling to MDF 181 auxiliary cabinets cabinet location 67 auxiliary connector outputs 249 auxiliary power alarms 257 attendant console 254 Avaya authentication file copying to media server 37 downloading 23 installing on media server 38 Avaya G700 Media Gateway installing 139 Avaya Site Administration launching 58 Avaya Site Administration ASA 301 October 2002 336 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Index B back up media server 295 back up battery 282 283 battery connecting 116 mounting 283 battery cabinet connecting to DC power cabinet 89 battery charger optional 80 battery holdover assembly 76 battery holdover connecting 77 78 battery interface module installing 82 battery leads connecting 76 battery connecting DC 86 bonding conductor coupled 191 BR2580A adapter 161 C cabinet cable clamps 159 cabinet address plugs 121 cabinet cli
199. ing the Control media gateway is shipped with the battery leads disconnected 1 Set the circuit breakers OFF See Expansion Control Media Gateway Battery Location Right Side on page 116 Connect the battery leads The battery is near the top of the carrier toward the front right The battery leads are located next to the battery and are accessible from the front of the media gateway Expansion Control Media Gateway Battery Location Right Side ta EET 4 3LJK 031096 Figure notes 1 2 3 4 Battery Battery Lead Connector Circuit Breakers Located Between plates Media Gateway Single Point Ground Block October 2002 117 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Ground and Connect AC Powered Media Gateways A CAUTION S8700 Multi Connect configuration grounding shall comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the applicable code at the installation site gt NOTE Before connecting the media gateways approved ground determine the best method of grounding See Approved Grounds itd more information Also locate the approved ground as close to the media gateways as possible gt NOTE The ground plates and media gateway clips are installed later in this procedure Connect the AC Grounds e Connect AC Power Ground on page 117 e
200. ing Telecommunications Security Telecommunications security of voice data and or video communi cations is the prevention of any type of intrusion to that is either unauthorized or malicious access to or use of your company s tele communications equipment by some party io 66 Your company s telecommunications equipment includes both this Avaya product and any other voice data video equipment that could be accessed via this Avaya product that is networked equipment An outside party is anyone who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Whereas a malicious party is anyone including someone who may be other wise authorized who accesses your telecommunications equipment with either malicious or mischievous intent Such intrusions may be either to through synchronous time multi plexed and or circuit based or asynchronous character message or packet based equipment or interfaces for reasons of Utilization of capabilities special to the accessed equipment Theft such as of intellectual property financial assets or toll facility access Eavesdropping privacy invasions to humans e Mischief troubling but apparently innocuous tampering Harm such as harmful tampering data loss or alteration regardless of motive or intent Be aware that there may be a risk of unauthorized intrusions associ ated with your system and or its networked
201. ing administration is done on a computer used to access the active media server using the media server web interface 1 Under Security click View License Status and verify that the license mode is now normal Connect the USB Modems Ay WARNING Once the modems are cabled to the servers do not unplug the modem USB cable on the active server If modems must be changed do it on the standby server Required options in the modems will be set by the operating system on the server There are no options to set on the modems themselves Co located servers Both servers share one telephone line October 2002 213 Connect the Hardware 1 Install two RJ11 jack outlets wired to a single 1MB Measured Business telephone line 2 Connect the RJ11 jacks one to each server with the modular telephone cord supplied with the modem 3 Connecta USB cable supplied with the modem from one of the modems to server 1 4 Connect the other modem via USB cable to server 2 Separated servers gt NOTE For more information on media servers in 2 locations refer to the job aid entitled Server Separation Avaya 8700 Media Server Each server has a dedicated telephone line 1 Terminate the two IMB telephone lines one at each server at RJ11 jack outlets 2 Connectthe modems to their respective server via a modular telephone cord supplied with the modem 3 Connecta USB cable supplied with the modem from the modem to the server at ea
202. install a third rectifier module N 1 4 If4to5 carriers are installed in the system install a fourth rectifier module The fifth rectifier module slot is reserved for future system growth Rectifier Module Installation pcdfrec KLC 101196 Figure notes 1 Install Battery Interface Unit into Slot 1 2 Install Rectifier Modules into Slots 2 5 3 Rectifier Module 3 in Slot 4 4 Test Points 5 Main Circuit Breakers Connect Power and Ground s Have a qualified electrician connect and route wires from the AC load center to the dedicated electrical outlet for the power distribution unit 1 Connect 1 end of a 6 AWG 40 16 mm cabinet GROUND wire to the ground terminal block at the bottom rear of the cabinet See Typical Media Gateway Grounding Wiring Diagram on page 85 2 Routethe cabinet GROUND wire to the AC load center single point ground and connect 3 Connect each remaining media gateway to the AC load center single point ground October 2002 83 84 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Power Distribution Unit J58890CH pedf010 KLC 020599 Figure notes 1 o a fF WO N N Connect small battery holdover cable or temperature sensor cable from large battery cabinet to J20 Carrier Circuit Breakers Ground Terminal Block Connect 48 VDC Return 1 AWG 50 mm red cable here Connect 48 VDC 1 AWG 50 mm black cable 1 AWG 50 mm 50 ft 15 2 m cable to la
203. ircuit Example MDF Connections Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway on page 146 shows the cross connections for common circuit packs Refer to this figure when cross connecting wire pairs to the MDF October 2002 145 Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware Example MDF Connections Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway 9 gt Yellow Field p 9 P Malan Mallar DIE Ze v 9 ie m a lj T e 25 Pair 9 10 z ZA aia A A ZA f Cable Sole Eee zzi GEL EU UIT Loe o A A A Tr t A A 7 A E mE Ss as HL DB PY HER T PH LHH f A A o ji 7A Z Z tA E H A it AHH A E ye DIT PHTH op E Tuy Network i tg ET PH Ct A A Zp Ww H 7 Intrface o tf Ye A E 22 f IE ji T t ELLE HERE pE 7 A PT gan ZK gi t Z ff H7 A A 2 A A Ii Ul i h 7 Ll gi 4 H7 A A ERR bh Mr iu 2S 05 Pair 25 Pair Cable Cable Oo 25 Pair o 9 Cable o LAE ONS Trunk Circuit Pack Line Circuit Pack 0016 0 RBP 052296
204. irectly to the 110 type terminal block connectors See 4 Pair Run to Equipment Room or Satellite Location on page 167 3 Pair to 4 Pair Station Circuit Distribution 3 Pair to 4 Pair Satellite Location Connectivity on page 168 shows the 3 pair circuit distribution from an equipment room MDF to a satellite location using 110 type hardware Four pair circuits are distributed from the satellite location to the information outlets October 2002 166 Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room Three pair circuits can also be run directly from the equipment room MDF to a 356A adapter as shown in 3 Pair to 4 Pair Circuit Distribution and Connectivity on page 169 Four pair station cables connect the adapter to the information outlets Four pair station cables can be run directly from a satellite location to the information outlets as previously described gt NOTE Bridged taps are not allowed on any part of the station wiring 4 Pair Circuit Distribution and Connectivity Figure notes 1 Partof Main Distribution Frame MDF 2 3 Pair Connecting Blocks 3 4 Pair Connecting Blocks 4 Purple Field 5 Blue Field 6 Jumpers Le Patch Cord or Cross Connect 10 11 12 13 lt lt 9 lt lt ele 1764797a CJL 031396 To Media Gateway Three Pair Modularity B25A Cable Connectorized Staggered Finger Multiple 25 Pair Cable 258A or BR2580A Adapter In
205. is repeated until disconnect which is forced after 24 hours Test Type 9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 16 dB 105 1 second of silence 9 seconds of 404 Hz tone at 16 dB second of silence 9 seconds of 2804 Hz tone at 16 dB 30 seconds of silence 0 5 seconds of test progress tone 2225 Hz About 5 seconds of silence Forced disconnect Test the C LAN Connectivity 1 To test the external IP connections ping the C LAN circuit pack and ping a known computer connected to your network If everything is configured correctly the Result column on the Ping Results screen reads PASS If it reads ABORT verify the IP address information and check the connectivity including the cabling To ping the C LAN server type ping ip address Paddress board UUCSS and press Enter The variable Paddress is the IP address of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack Type ping ip address Paddress board UUCSS and press Enter The variable Paddress is the IP address of another computer beyond the gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack October 2002 317 Testing the Complete Configuration Test Stratum 3 Clock if used S8700 Multi Connect only These procedures test the ability of the Stratum 3 clock to correctly provide timing and alarms to the media server CAUTION The following procedures are destructive to DS
206. ises connections 261 off premises digital line circuit protectors 264 off premises protection 263 264 off premises station wiring 260 off premises stations 261 order checking 65 101 out of building connections 261 out of building stations 261 outputs cable for control carrier 249 P patch cords installing and administering 175 PCMCIA dirve on 8700 Media Server 295 PCMCIA flashcard to back up S8700 Media Server files 295 pin designations port circuit packs and telephones 244 251 playback announcement testing 315 PN expansion interface exchange testing 311 TDM testing 310 Port Assignment Record form 175 port cabinet jumper fields 121 port circuit pack pin designations 244 251 positioning 129 power single phase 240VAC 72 power cabinet ground connecting approved DC ground 86 power cabinet grounds connecting DC 86 power distribution unit 258 286 power receptacles 103 power supplies for telephones installing and wiring 278 power supply 285 1151A1 48V 287 1151A2 48V 287 power supply inspecting 101 October 2002 340 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Index PPN cabinets cabinet location 67 103 pre installation setup 19 primary protectors off premises connections 263 264 programmable circuit packs TN2302AP 222 protection electromagnetic 124 provisioning plan 143 Q queue warning indicator 277 queue warning indicator testing 314 R recorded announ
207. istribution Office Trunk Circuit Pack Field 5 To Power Transfer Unit 3 To TN2183 or Equivalent Analog Line 6 To Control Carrier Auxiliary Circuit Pack Connector Install Telephones Used Only for Emergency Transfer Trunk Auxiliary Field 1 Connecta pair of wires between the 48V and GRD terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block and the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal See Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer on page 273 2 Connect Central Office CO trunk leads from the purple field to TC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk 3 Connect CO trunk leads from the green field to TK terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk October 2002 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connect ST leads on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each emergency transfer telephone to the assigned terminal in the blue or white station distribution field The ST terminal leads should be terminated on the following pairs 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 or 22 the first pair of any 3 pair group Install the telephone Connect telephone to the information outlet Install patch cords jumper wires between the media gateway side and the station side of the station distribution field on the MDF Install Telephones Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension Trunk Auxiliary Field 1 Connect a pair of wires between t
208. it 286 8700 Media Server 319 Stratum 3 clock 317 T1 E1 status 329 test on server 40 testing on 88700 Media Server 319 UPS 321 license file copying to media server 37 downloading 23 installing on media server 38 light emitting diodes See LEDs locating the MDF 148 LSP installing 139 M main circuit breaker 87 Main Distribution Frame See MDF MCC earthquake protection 68 69 MDF alarm connections 258 emergency transfer connections 269 emergency transfer unit 266 off premises connections 260 261 MDF cabling 153 MDF connections multicarrier cabinet 146 MDF connections single carrier cabinet 145 MDF cross connect fields 147 MDF hardware 144 MDF labels 150 MDF location 148 MDF cabling to auxiliary cabinet 181 MDF cabling to cabinet 181 media gateway connect SCC1 ribbon cables 199 G700 139 media server backing up 295 collocated media server 43 LEDs 319 separated media server 43 testing LEDs 319 verify connectivity 211 media server interchange testing 308 media server web interface 300 mixed AC DC powered cabinet connecting 89 modem access to media server 302 modems connecting 212 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 339 Index modularity 3 pair and 4 pair 252 mounting terminal blocks 183 185 music on hold testing 315 N National Electrical Code grounding rules 71 106 117 network ITS connecting 224 night ringing testing 314 O off prem
209. itical reliability configuration use the pass through tool to feed the long ribbon cable through media gateway A October 2002 202 Connect the Hardware cadsrib2 KLC 032602 10 12 13 Plug the ribbon cable into the top connector on the component side of the TN775D maintenance circuit pack Push the tabs on the ends of the connector inward to lock the connector in place Thread the ribbon cable through the remaining slot on the faceplate of the TN775D circuit pack Route the cable through the TDM slot in the back of the SCC1 media gateway A and up to SCC1 media gateway B October 2002 Connect the Hardware cadsrib4 KLC 032602 Figure notes 1 Media Gateway B 3 TDM cable slot 2 Media Gateway A 14 Use the pass through tool to feed the long ribbon cable through media gateway B 15 Connectthe long cable to the connector on the component side of the TN2312AP IPSI in media gateway A October 2002 203 204 Connect the Hardware 16 Fully insert the TN775D and TN2312AP circuit packs 17 Ifthe CAT 5 Ethernet cables have already been run to the IPSI circuit packs replace the upper and lower rear covers Replace the ground plate 18 Ifthe CAT 5 Ethernet cables have not been run to the IPSI circuit packs go to Verify connectivity to the media servers on page 211 October
210. ks are fully inserted into the proper slots according to the System Diagram shipped with the 8700 Multi Connect configuration Report any discrepancies in circuit pack type or quantity to your Avaya representative For detailed circuit pack descriptions refer to Designing the Avaya 8700 Media Gateway for Multi Connect Configuration 2 Check the S8700 Multi Connect configuration adjuncts for damage and report all damage according to local shipping instructions October 2002 67 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Correct Shipping Errors 1 Red tag all defective and over shipped equipment and return to the nearest Material Stocking Location MSL To contact the Avaya Order Exception group in the United States call 1 800 772 5409 For international customers contact your order service agent Direct all short shipped reports to the nearest MSL Contact the appropriate location for specific instructions Position the Media Gateway Each media gateway is normally positioned adjacent to the control hardware in the rack or another media gateway gt NOTE Typically the center stage switch is collocated with a port network PN It is not required to be located in port network 1 If the S8700 Multi Connect configuration is supplied with cable ductwork space the media gateways on 32 in 81 3 cm centers 1 8 in 0 3 cm They must be level and must be square with respect to each other If the S8700 Multi Connect co
211. larms 323 terminal blocks frame mounting 185 terminal blocks wall mounting 183 terminal emulation 301 terminals connecting 165 terminating trunk transmission test types 316 test server LEDs 40 test types terminating trunk transmission 316 testing complete configuration 306 three phase VAC power 72 tie trunk analog wiring 244 digital wiring 245 TILTWATCH indicators 65 66 time division multiplexor See TDM TN2302AP Amphenol adapter 224 TN2302AP IP Media Processor 222 TN2312AP administering 60 connect Ethernet cables 193 connect ribbon cables 199 faceplate 324 program switch ID and cabinet 205 TN2312AP IP Server Interface LEDs 323 TN2501AP integrated announcements faceplate LEDs and interpretation 232 TN799DP administering 219 TN799DP circuit pack 316 TN799DP C LAN 216 installing 217 TN801B MAP D 228 tone clocks service state 307 transfer emergency testing 315 translations backing up 295 saving 295 troubleshooting 8700 IP Connect installation 331 8700 Multi Connect installation 331 trunk cables installing 155 trunk pairs connecting with concentrator cables 178 trunk pairs connecting with jumper wires 179 trunk transmission testing 316 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect 341 Index U uniform call distribution testing queue warning indicator 314 uninterruptible power supply configure 51 UPS LEDs 321 security alert 51 SNMP module 51 using DHCP IP address
212. le Slack Manager Station Wiring Design on page 160 e Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room on page 165 e Layout on page 173 e Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration on page 175 October 2002 142 Installing the Telecommunications Cabling Installing the Telecommunications Cabling 1 2 3 4 oa 10 Label Expansion Control Carrier Cable on page 177 Connect Expansion Control Carrier Outputs Cable on page 177 Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables on page 178 Connect Trunk Pairs to Media Gateway Using Jumper Wires To Establish 3 Pair Modularity on page 179 Install Cables Between Media Gateway and MDF on page 181 Install Connector Cables Between Auxiliary Cabinet and MDF on page 181 Mount 110A or 110P type terminal blocks on the wall on page 183 or Mount 110P type terminal blocks on a frame on page 185 Install Cable Slack Managers on page 187 Install Sneak Fuse Panels on page 188 Install Coupled Bonding Conductor on page 191 October 2002 143 Provisioning Plan Provisioning Plan A provisioning plan should be completed prior to an installation The plan determines an appropriate available port circuit on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration for each telephone trunk and peripheral connection needed and any auxiliary power
213. le connector Install the label near the rear of the connector so it is not obscured by the media gateway connector retainers It can also be installed on the skin of the cable near the connector October 2002 154 Cable Installation Cable Routing Guidelines Cable Routing to Top Terminal Blocks on page 156 and Cable Routing to Bottom Terminal Blocks on page 157 show typical cable routing from the media gateway to the top and bottom of the MDF respectively Use these guidelines when routing cables from the media gateway to the MDF Following these guidelines will maximize use of the cable slack managers and make future cabling additions and changes easier e Connect each port cable at the media gateway and then route it along the front trough of the cable slack manager to the connecting terminal block where the cable is terminated Leave enough slack at the media gateway end of the cable to allow for proper dressing of the cables Route the cable from the media gateway to the wall Place the cable beside 1 of the rows of columns in the cable slack manager gt NOTE Retainers mounted on the columns keep the cable from protruding above the top of the base of the cable slack manager Determine the length of the cable required to reach from the cable slack manager to the assigned connecting terminal block Use D rings on the wall to support the cable The cable must be supported Coil the
214. les Among Network Interface Sneak Fuse Panel and Media Gateway on page 155 And procedures for e Label Expansion Control Carrier Cable on page 177 e Connect Expansion Control Carrier Outputs Cable on page 177 e Connect Trunk Pairs Using Concentrator Cables on page 178 e Connect Trunk Pairs to Media Gateway Using Jumper Wires To Establish 3 Pair Modularity on page 179 e Install Cables Between Media Gateway and MDF on page 181 e Install Connector Cables Between Auxiliary Cabinet and MDF on page 181 Equipment Room Cabling Labels The purple port label shown in Equipment Room Cabling Labels on page 155 is installed on both ends of the 25 pair cables connecting to the trunk auxiliary field and or distribution field The top blue yellow building and floor labels are for cables connecting from the equipment room to a site satellite location on another floor or in another building The yellow label is for auxiliary circuits connecting to the trunk auxiliary field The bottom blue yellow label is for 25 pair cables connecting to site satellite closets Equipment Room Labels on page 155 details the label name and range of each label Cable Connector Building Label Ordering Information on page 156 provides label ordering information Self Stick Label on 25 Pair Cable Connector on page 156 shows the proper way to install a label on a 25 pair cab
215. listed CSA certified or must comply with local safety standards Sneak current protectors must have a maximum rating of 350 mA and a minimum voltage rating of 600 V or as required by local regulations The following devices protect the 58700 Multi Connect configuration from over voltages Analog trunks use the 507B sneak protector or equivalent Over voltage protection is normally provided by the local telephone company Analog voice terminals use one of the following types of combined over voltage and sneak current protection or equivalent Carbon block with heat coil for UL code 4B1C Gas tube with heat coil for UL code 4B1E W Solid state with heat coil for UL code 4C1S DCP and ISDN BRI terminals use the solid state 4C3S 75 with heat coil protector or equivalent DS1 E1 T1 circuits require isolation from exposed facilities This isolation may be provided by a CSU T1 LIU E1 or other equipment that provides equivalent protection October 2002 152 Sneak Fuse Panels Sneak Fuse Panels Sneak current protection is required between the incoming RJ21X or RJ2GX network interface and the 8700 Multi Connect configuration for both trunk and off premise circuit packs The Model 507B sneak current fuse panel or equivalent is recommended for sneak current protection The panel contains two 25 pair connectors fuse removal tool and fifty 220029 sneak fuses and two spares Connector cables B25A male to female connect the
216. lowing procedure establishes a record for use when connected to the Avaya 8700 Media Server 6 On the computer launch Avaya Site Administration 7 Click on File gt New gt Switch 8 Follow the Add Switch wizard to build a record e Give the record a name that indicates it will work with all Avaya S8700 media Servers October 2002 305 Accessing the Avaya S8700 Media Server Select Network Connection as the connection method Use the IP address assigned to the active media server Use port 5023 9 When the record is established test it by connecting to the media server To start Avaya Site Administration click Start Programs Avaya Site Administration Avaya Site Administration supports a terminal emulation mode which is directly equivalent to using commands on a dumb terminal or through a Telnet session Avaya Site Administration also supports a whole range of other features including the GEDI and Data Import For more information refer to the Help Guided Tour and Show Me accessed from the Avaya Site Administration Help menu gt NOTE When assigning login IDs do not start them with a number October 2002 306 Testing the Complete Configuration Testing the Complete Configuration This section provides tests for the complete configuration including the control and signaling networks and the telephones and consoles This section provides tests to e review the status of the configuration e test the
217. media gateway to the single point ground block 6 Atthe AC load center connect a 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire to the single point ground block This ground wire will later be tie wrapped to the trunk cables and connected to the Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC ground block at the MDF The Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC wires are installed and terminated in Cabling Media Gateways on page 141 Typical Media Gateway Ground Location O00 00 4 4 widmgrnd LJK 092697 Figure notes 1 First Media Gateway 5 AC Load Center Single Point Ground 2 Additional Media Gateways if 6 Less than 50 Wire feet 15 2 m etaed 10 AWG 825 6 mm Ground Wire 3 6 AWG 40 16 mm Media to CBC Gateway GROUND Wire 4 Media Gateway Ground Terminal Block October 2002 75 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Ground AC Load Center More Than 50 ft 15 2 m from Media Gateway 1 Mountthe single point ground block to any surface between the media gateways and the AC load center single point ground The single point ground block must be mounted to a non metallic surface 2 Atthe bottom rear of the first media gateway connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm media gateway GROUND wire to the media gateway ground block See Typical Media Gateway Grounding Wiring Diagram on page 76 Route the opposite end of the wire to the single point ground block and connect 4 Atthe next if p
218. mes ip Page 1 Of 1 UN IP NODE NAMES Name IP Address QE 93 268 71 d 20 49 40 e oT 75 4L20 Name IP Address Tiki 1272 22 322 cdr 1 192 168 22 default O 00 0 iolan 172 22 422 lolioccll L222 22 A oie baer od Oe 122 22 22 riki 112 22 22 rsat4 132 3L 5 rsat5 172 23 23 stl0clan 1 192 168 22 stl2clan 172 2225 522 stl2prowler 1 132 22 222 VAL 1 22522 222 12 of 12 administered node names are displayed Use list node names command to see all the administered node names wW change node names ip xxx to change a node name xxx or add a node name T 2 4 Type a unique name in the Name field This name is recognized only within the MultiVantage software and does not need to match the node name on your network Enter the IP Address Get this information from the network administrator or refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms 8S6700 Media Server Press Enter to save the changes Administer the IP interfaces 1 Type change ip interfaces and press Enter The IP Interfaces screen appears Use this screen to administer an IP interface which associates the circuit pack with an IP address October 2002 Connecting to the Customer s Network change ip interfaces Page 1 of 6 Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Address Rgn Be spss sssAAaASaKKK IP INTERFACES C LAN 01C16 TN79
219. mputer on the network Click Execute Ping Verify that the ping was successful indicating that DNS is working If available have a customer representative do the following test from a computer on their network 11 Click Start gt Run to open the Run dialog box 12 Type command to open an MS DOS command window 13 Type ping server2name where server2name is the host name of media server 2 if DNS is administered 14 Verify that the ping was successful 15 Type ping server2ipaddress where server2ipaddress is the IP address of media server 2 16 Verify that the ping was successful 17 Ifyou checked icmp earlier it was not a default setting uncheck both boxes to the left of it and click Set Security Test Media Server 2 LEDs The following administration uses the services laptop computer connected to media server 2 and the media server Web interface October 2002 49 Configure Media Server 2 1 Under Diagnostics click Test Server LEDs to test the media server LEDs 2 Observe the Active Standby and U2 LEDs on the front of the media server and the transmit LED on the duplication card on the back of the media server to ensure they are blinking The blinking stops after about a minute See 58700 Media Server LEDs on page 319 for more specific information Busy Out Standby Media Server The following administration uses the services laptop computer connected to media server 2 and the media server Web interface This action p
220. n 110 Terminal Block y OORA WO Iw Central Location for Terminals 1 through 6 10 11 12 LLLI LL a ul a ul a a a ul a a a a La t a a al ul a a a a a a a 9 5 2 crd 5pr CJL 103096 D Inside Wire Cut Down to Connecting Block 258A Adapter Information Outlet Voice Terminal To Port Connector on Media Gateway Media Gateway 1 Carrier A Slot 03 October 2002 177 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Example 4 Pair Labeling to Information Outlet ZIL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL 9 crdf4pr CJL 102996 Figure notes 1 Equipment Room 6 258A Adapter 2 To Central Location for Terminals 1 7 D Inside Wire Cut Down to through 6 Connecting Block 3 Blue Row on 110 Terminal Block 8 Information Outlet Voice Terminal e 4 Purple Row on 110 Terminal Block 5 To Port Connector on Media Gateway Media Gateway 1 Carrier A Slot 03 Label Expansion Control Carrier Cable 1 Place the appropriate AUX connector label on the assigned 110 type terminal block row 2 Onthe expansion control carrier cable place a yellow auxiliary label on the connectors at each end of the cable 3 Write AUX on each label Connect Expansion Control Carrier Outputs Cable Installing the Telecommunications C
221. n Field 10 1758432b MMR 052996 Cable Slack Manager Number 2 Cable Slack Manager Number 3 Media Gateway s Building Cables Through Cable Trough 10 AWG 25 6 mm Wire to Coupled Bonding Conductor October 2002 157 158 Coupled Bonding Conductor Coupled Bonding Conductor The Coupled Bonding Conductor CBC connects to the single point ground block and runs adjacent to pairs in an associated telecommunications cable The mutual coupling between the bonding conductor and the pairs reduces potential differences in terminating equipment The conductor consists of a 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire tie wrapped to the inside wiring cable and terminated at the CBC terminal bar at the Main Distribution Frame MDF A minimum of 12 inches 30 48 cm spacing must be maintained between the CBC and other power and ground leads The 10 AWG 25 2 5 mm wire must be long enough to reach the telecommunications cables at the rear of the media gateways follow these cables to the MDF and to terminate at the CBC October 2002 159 Installation Space Requirements Installation Space Requirements This section has information about Sneak Fuse Panels and Emergency Transfer Units on page 159 110 Type Hardware on page 159 Cable Slack Manager on page 159 Sneak Fuse Panels and Emergency Transfer Units Approximately eight inches 20 cm of horizontal wall space is required for each column of
222. n the blue field 110PE1 900FT Field terminated on both the white and blue fields 451A Adapter Ordering Information Color Comcode Gray 103942272 Ivory 103786240 October 2002 163 Station Wiring Design Example of Extending 4 Pair Station Cables crdfadi CJL 101596 Figure notes 1 Station Cable A 258A Adapter 2 Information Outlet 5 4 Pair Station Cable 3 451A In Line Adapter 258A and BR2580A Adapters crdfadp CJL 101596 Figure notes 1 BR2580A Adapter 3 25 Pair Male Ribbon Connector 2 258A Adapter 4 4 Pair Modular Jacks 8 Pins October 2002 164 Station Wiring Design 356A Adapter crdf356 CJL 101296 Figure notes 1 356A Adapter 2 4 Pair Modular Jacks 6 pins each connected to 25 pair ribbon connector Adapter Ordering Information Description Comcode 258A Adapter 102605136 BR2580A Adapter 403384720 356A Adapter 104158829 400B Adapter 103848859 400B2 Adapter 104152558 ZD8AJ Adapter 103881421 October 2002 165 Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room Station Circuit Distribution from Equipment Room This section explains the station circuit distribution from the equipment room to the information outlets for new wiring installations Example connection diagrams are provided to show the options for running and connecting the station cables If most of the telephones voice terminals that require
223. n to Customer s LAN if provided The following administration uses the services laptop computer connected to media server 1 and uses the media server Web interface Refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms 858700 Media Server for information on how to access a computer on the customer s network 1 Connect a customer supplied CATS straight through cable from media server 1 port 4 Eth4 to the customer s LAN Refer to Getting Started with the Avaya S8700 Media Server with MCCI or SCCI Media Gateway PDF gt NOTE For security reasons you may not be able to ping out to the customer s network If you are not able to look at the LAN security settings particularly icmp 2 Under Security click Set LAN Security 3 If icmp is not checked check both boxes to the left and click Set Security October 2002 48 Configure Media Server 2 4 Under Diagnostics click Execute Ping Execute Ping Select Host or IP address to Ping Select the following options Do not look up symbolic names for host addresses Bypass normal routing tables and send directly to a host Execute Ping About This Screen N o foe 9 10 Type in the IP address of a computer on the network Click Execute Ping Verify that the ping was successful indicating that the media server is connected to the customer s network Type in the host name if DNS is administered of a co
224. ncement files Important File Specifications Voice Announcement over LAN VAL requires that announcement files are in the following wav formats e CCITT A Law or CCITT p Law mu Law companding format do not use PCM e 8 kKHz sample rate e 8 bit resolution bits per sample Mono channels 1 You must convert other wave wav file formats to those listed above Telephone access creates the correct file formats Caveats Remember the following points when using the TN2501AP integrated announcement circuit pack for the first time Despite the feature name announcements are not played over the LAN but can be transferred to and from the TN2501AP circuit pack over the LAN e You cannot save or restore announcements to a TN2501AP circuit pack to or from a TN750C circuit pack flashcards tape magneto optical disks October 2002 230 Connecting to the Customer s Network Installing VAL gt NOTE To install a TN2501AP make sure that the system is enabled for TN2501AP VAL boards If the Maximum VAL boards field on the Customer Options screen is set to 0 then you need to obtain and install a new license file before you can install the card Installing the pack includes e Verifying the required hardware on page 230 e Install the TN2501AP Circuit Pack on page 232 e Administer the TN2501 AP on page 233 Verifying the required hardware Make sure that you have the required h
225. nd Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies These links provide information and wiring examples of installation procedures for the 1145B22 and 1151A1 1151A2 power supplies These are examples only and actual wiring procedures may vary at each site gt NOTE Refer to the Installation and Adjuncts and Peripherals for Avaya MultiVantage DEFINITY Server to install the necessary peripheral equipment Power supplies include e 1145B22 Power Supply on page 278 e 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies on page 287 P333T PWR Power over Ethernet Stackable Switch on page 289 1145B22 Power Supply The 1145B22 closet power arrangement provides an uninterruptible 48 VDC power source with battery and 1146B2 distribution unit for ISDN DCP terminal equipment adjuncts and other customer supplied equipment During AC power interruptions batteries automatically provide power to the load gt NOTE Before you begin read this Important Warning for 1145B2 Power Supply on page 278 Perform these tasks in order 1 Install the Wall Mounting Plates on page 282 Mount the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit on page 283 Install the Battery Mounting Wiring on page 283 Install the Expanded Power Distribution Unit on page 284 Power Up and Test the Power Supply on page 285 Wire the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit on page 285 0o
226. nd so on The switch ID is not the carrier letter 3 While the display is flashing press the button until the switch ID A through J shows on the top character of the LED display When the correct letter shows stop It will flash a few times 5 seconds then stop The next character down will begin to flash gt NOTE If you pass up the letter number you want you must either cycle through all the letters numbers to get to the letter number you want or reinsert reseat the circuit pack and start at the beginning gt NOTE The number to program is the cabinet number not the port network number If you have more than one IPSI in a cabinet they all have the same cabinet number even if it is a split cabinet with 2 or more port networks 4 While the first digit of the cabinet number is flashing press the button until the correct tens digit 0 through 6 shows on the display When the correct number shows stop It will flash a few times then stop five seconds The second digit of the cabinet number will begin flashing 5 While the second digit of the cabinet number is flashing press the button until the correct units digit 0 through 9 shows on the display When the correct number shows stop The units digit will flash a few times then stop five seconds October 2002 208 Connect the Hardware 6 All segments of the display will go dark for one second and then the Switch ID and Cabinet number will be displayed in the top t
227. ndant console and connect the modular cord to the information outlet 2 Install labels per the attendant console form and the Display Module form assignments 3 Install a digital line circuit pack in the assigned carrier slot if an additional circuit pack is required 4 Administer the forms listed in Attendant Console in Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software 302D Console phdf302 KLC 101196 Install the 26B1 Selector Console 1 Connect the supplied 3 foot 1 meter D8AC cable to the modular jack on the bottom of the 26B1 Selector Console October 2002 257 Installing and Wiring Telephones 2 Route the cable to the attendant console and connect to the DXS BLF jack 3 Attach labels according to the Attendant Console form 4 Administer the console using Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software Connect External Alarm Indicators and Auxiliary Power Alarms can be generated on adjunct equipment sent to the media server and recorded and reported as external alarms A typical major alarm input is from an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS The media server provides a relay contact that can operate a customer provided alarm such as a light or bell The circuitry and power source are customer provided The alarm device must not exceed a rating of more than 100 volts at 0 75 amperes 1 Connect 1 major and 1 minor alarm input pair to the trunk auxiliary field from the AUX connector See
228. nditions When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed e If liquid has been spilled into the product e If the product has been exposed to rain or water e If the product was dropped or the housing has been damaged e If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions Using 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies The 1151A1 and 1151A2 Power Supplies can be used to supply local power to ISDN T 85xx and 84xx series telephones connected to a media gateway and to the 302D Attendant Console that requires auxiliary power for its display The unit can supply power to adjunct equipment such as 5201A and CS201A speakerphones or a 500A Headset Adapter attached to any currently manufactured analog DCP or ISDN T telephone equipped with an adjunct jack A CAUTION The power supply can be used only with telecommunications equipment indoors and in a controlled environment The power supply has a single output of 48 volts DC 0 4 amperes and can operate from either a 120 volts AC 60 hertz power source 105 to 129 volts AC or a 220 230 240 volts AC 50 hertz power source 198 to 264 volts AC Input voltage selection is automatic The output capacity is 19 2 watts The power supply can be placed on a flat surface such as a desk For wall mounting keyhole slots are provided on the bottom of the chassis CAUTION Do not locate the unit within 6
229. ne 25 pair row of the 110 type terminal block One 25 pair cable is required for each line circuit pack gt NOTE The 16 port analog line circuit pack requires an adapter cable to connect from one connector on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration to two 25 pair connectors on a terminal block Two MET circuit packs require a concentrator cable to connect from two connectors on the 8700 Multi Connect configuration to one 25 pair connector on a terminal block The yellow field auxiliary field terminates all 25 pair cables from the auxiliary cabinet and the Processor Interface The yellow field is located in the lower right hand corner of the distribution field The white field station field terminates the station wiring The white field indicates 3 pair station circuits eight circuits per 25 pair cable routed through a satellite closet The blue field station field also terminates station wiring The blue field indicates 3 and or 4 pair station circuits eight or six circuits respectively per 25 pair cable The fourth pair of the 4 pair station circuit provides adjunct power from the cross connect field on an as needed basis to terminals within 250 feet 76 m of the MDF October 2002 148 Main Distribution Frame Main Distribution Frame The preferred location of the Main Distribution Frame MDF is directly behind the Avaya SCCI Media Gateway stack or the Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Typical 110A Type Terminal Blocks SCC
230. ne the size of station cables containing 4 pair circuits find out how many information outlets are served by the equipment room MDF or satellite location MDF Multiply the number of information outlets by 4 Then using the minimum size cable requirement round up the cable size requirement to the next highest available cable bundle size gt NOTE This formula may not compensate for the unused twenty fifth pair in all cases If not it must be allowed for October 2002 175 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Before starting the patch cord installation obtain a copy of the Port Assignment Record forms from the customer or marketing representative See Port Assignment Record Form on page 175 These forms contain the port assignments and identify the extension numbers Terminal No of the telephones voice terminals Enter the jack assignments at the equipment room and indicate if adjunct power is required and where it is provided MDF site satellite closet or information outlet When satellite locations are provided enter the satellite letter designation A through F and the jack appearance in the equipment room on the form Also enter the floor designation and or building designation if appropriate For 1 point administration this entry is all that is required The white label identifying the terminal block row associated with circuits 17 to 24 connects
231. nect only Testing Telephones and Other Equipment on page 313 October 2002 307 Testing the Complete Configuration Testing Port Network Equipment These tests verify that the Time Division Multiplexing TDM cables terminators and the Inter Cabinet Cables MCC1 Media Gateway work If a FAIL Result code is seen check these cables If problems persist refer to the maintenance book for your configuration Check Port Network Status for Each Media Gateway The port network status may suggest problem areas Tests described later provide more specific diagnostic information 1 Type status port network number 1 64 and press Enter Verify the screen displays a Port Network Status screen similar to the one in Sample Port Network Status Screen for Cabinet 1 S8700 Multi Connect Verify these service states Field Service State TDM Bus A in TDM Bus B in Tone Clock in PKT in Sample Port Network Status Screen for Cabinet 1 S8700 Multi Connect status port network 1 Major 1 1 A in B in dd TDM Service Bus State Minor PN Alarms Alarms Alarms Control Channel PORT NETWORK STATUS Warning Carrier PN Control FIBER Locs Active Standby LINK Endpoints Mode 01A up up 1 B PNC 01B02 03E04 standby 01B 1 A PNC 01A01 01E04 active Dedicated TONE Service System System Tones CLOCK State Clock Tones n O1B in standby standby y 01A in active active Major Minor Bus Open Bu
232. nector Store the excess cable in the cable slack manager Repeat Steps 2 through 6 until all cables are installed Self Stick Label on 25 Pair Cable Connector BB m O Ibdf25p LJK 101596 October 2002 183 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Mount 110A or 110P type terminal blocks on the wall The 110A type terminal blocks can be stacked in almost any arrangement at any height or location on the wall One arrangement is shown in 110A Type Terminal Blocks 300 Pair on page 184 The distance between the mounting screw holes on the terminal blocks is 10 8 in 27 4 cm If a vertical patch cord trough is used the distance between the mounting screw holes is 5 31 in 13 3 cm With 110P type terminal blocks the first block of the trunk auxiliary field is aligned with the left side of the media gateway See 110P Type Terminal Blocks 900 Pair on page 185 This arrangement allows for growth on the right side of the MDF 1 10 Route the cables from the rear of the media gateway stack to the MDF via the Cable Slack Manager on page 159 See Install Cable Slack Managers on page 187 If you are installing 300 pair terminal blocks draw a level horizontal line on the wall 47 5 in 1 2 m above the floor See 110A Type Terminal Blocks 300 Pair on page 184 If you are installing 900 pair terminal blocks draw a level horizontal line on the wall 23 in
233. ned to the UPSs and Ethernet switch 1 Under SNMP click Configure Trap Destinations to administer the simple network management protocol SNMP October 2002 42 Configure Media Server 1 2 Click Add to add new trap destinations and community strings Add Trap Destination Fill in IP address and provide data for one of the three SNIVIP versions Check to enable this destination IP address C C SNMP version 1 Community name C SNMP version 2c Notification type trap gt Community name C SNMP version 3 Notification type tap j User name Disconnect from media server 1 1 Unplug the CATS cable from the services port on the back of media server 1 October 2002 43 Connect Duplication Cables Connect Duplication Cables How you connect the duplication cables depends on whether the media servers are installed in the same room or in separate locations The 8700 Media Servers can be located up to 6 miles 10 kilometers apart Collocated media servers Connect the crossover CATS cable and fiber optic cable between the 2 media servers For a connectivity guide refer to Getting Started with the Avaya S8700 Media Server with G600 Media Gateway or Getting Started with the Avaya 8700 Media Server with MCCI or SCCI Media Gateway Separated media servers When S8700 media servers are located greater than 100 meters but less than 10 kilometers apart they are consider
234. nfiguration is supplied with cable slack managers place the media gateways far enough from the connection field to lay down the 32 in 81 3 cm slack managers and to provide a little extra room for the cables to access the cable slack managers If earthquake protection is required Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway on page 68 If earthquake protection is not required level the media gateways and adjust and lock the media gateway stabilizing bolts to keep it from moving At the bottom of the media gateway install the hole plugs provided in the holes previously occupied by the 4 carriage bolts Position the Auxiliary Cabinet Optional 1 Position the auxiliary cabinet next to the control hardware in the rack or a media gateway The location of equipment inside the auxiliary cabinet is specified in the Customer Service Document CSD If earthquake protection is required refer to Install Earthquake Protection for Media Gateway on page 68 If earthquake protection is not required level the auxiliary cabinet and adjust and lock its stabilizing bolts to keep it from moving October 2002 68 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Install Auxiliary Cabinet Equipment The auxiliary cabinet allows for carrier 23 in 58 4 cm rack or panel mounting of the hardware The following equipment is furnished with the media gateway e Fuse panel Distributes 48 VDC power to fused cabinet cir
235. nfigure Interfaces Configure Switches Set DNS DHCP Set Static Routes Configure Time Server Set Modem Interface Update System Continue Select server type The server type for this server is not set Select which type of server this is C Avaya 58700 Media Server for Multi Connect configuration Avaya 58700 Media Server for IP Connect configuration Click CONTINUE to proceed About This Screen Configure Server Progress Review Notices Copy Settings Set Identities Configure Interfaces Configure Switches Set DNS DHCP Set Static Routes Configure Time Server Set Modem Interface Update System Select server type The server type for this server is not set Select which type of server this is Avaya 58700 Media Server for Multi Connect configuration C Avaya S8700 Media Server for IP Connect configuration Click CONTINUE to proceed About This Screen Upgrade media server software if necessary If a software upgrade is required 1 Click the X in the upper right hand corner to close the configure server window when the Review Notices screen displays 2 Click the Upgrade tab above and go to Upgrading Software on an Initial Installation of an Avaya S8700 Media Server to upgrade to the latest issue of software 3 After the software upgrade is complete go to Continue Server 1 configuration on page 33 If a software upgrade is not required continue with the configure server process Octob
236. nnect jumpers to wire the terminal to the port circuit pack See 302D to 4 wire DCP Wiring on page 242 This pinout is for the 4 wire Digital Line circuit pack A CAUTION Do not use the 329A power unit for the attendant console Use an 1151A1 1151A2 1145A or MSP 1 power unit 5 For terminals needing adjunct power wire 48 VDC and ground to appropriate pins on the terminal See 302D to 4 wire DCP Wiring on page 242 October 2002 242 Installing and Wiring Telephones 302D to 4 wire DCP Wiring 9 9 TXT 1 lt lt 2 39 TXT5 TXR 2 2 14 TXR5 PXT 3 3 40 PXT5 PXR 6 3 3 15 PXR5 Q 9 O a gt O 302cwire RBP 040596 Figure notes 1 302D Attendant Console 3 48 VDC From Adjunct Power 2 4 wire Digital Line Circuit Pack 4 Ground From Adjunct Power Position 1C02 Connect Adjunct Power The 400B2 adapter is convenient for connecting local 48 VDC power to a modular plug See 400B2 Adapter Connecting to a Modular Plug on page 243 Each port network can provide power for up to three attendant consoles This source of power is preferred for the attendant consoles because it has the same battery backup as the media gateway See Auxiliary Connector Outputs MCC1 and SCC1 media gateways only on page 249 gt NOTE Adjunct power can be provided locally at the telephone or console by either the 1151A1 or 1
237. nstall License About This Screen gt NOTE After you install the license file the media server will be in No License Mode until the media server recognizes the reference IPSI which is after it receives its IP address later in the process This is normal on a new installation gt NOTE Installing the Avaya authentication file removes all default passwords and establishes new ones After the installation services logins specific to the media server are protected through Access Security Gateway ASG 2 Click Install Avaya Authentication gt Install to install the Avaya authentication file Verify Media Server 1 Connection to Customer s LAN if provided The following administration uses the services laptop computer connected to media server 1 and uses the media server Web interface October 2002 39 Configure Media Server 1 Refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S8700 Media Server for information on how to access a computer on the customer s network 1 Connect a customer supplied CATS straight through cable from media server 1 port 4 Eth4 to the customer s LAN Refer to Getting Started with the Avaya S8700 Media Server with MCCI or SCC1 Media Gateway PDF gt NOTE For security reasons you may not be able to ping out to the customer s network If you are not able to look at the LAN security settings particularly icmp 2 Under Security click Set LAN Secu
238. nts 7 8 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Contents Check Commercial Power and Connect AC Power 94 Connect Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling 94 Connect Fiber Optic Cables 85 Connect Duplex or High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node 95 Connect High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node 96 Connect Critical Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node 97 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack 99 Unpack and Inspect Media Gateways 101 Check Circuit Packs 102 Position the Media Gateway Stacks 103 Install Earthquake Protection for Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway 103 Ground DC power media gateways 106 Connect Ground to DC power cabinet 106 Connect Ground for DC power cabinet 106 Connect DC Battery Frame Ground 107 Connect DC Power Distribution Unit Ground 108 Connect DC Power Cabinet Ground 109 Connect DC Power 110 Connect the DC power 110 Making DC Power Connections 111 DC Power Connections with DC Distribution Unit 111 Stacking DC Power Cabinets 111 Connect AC Power to DC Power Cabinet 114 Connect Battery Cabinet 115 Connect Optional Battery Leads 116 Ground and Connect AC Powered Media Gateways 117 Connect the AC Grounds TIT Connect AC Power Ground TEE Set the Ringer Frequency 119 Connect the Power Cord into the Power Receptacle 119 Connect Time Division Multiplexing Bus Cables 119 Verify Po
239. o the installer 4 Inserta long punch through the holes drilled in Step 3 and mark the concrete floor beneath the raised floor panels Remove the raised floor panels in which the holes were drilled 6 Using 1 2 in 1 3 cm anchor bits drill a hole at each of the locations marked in Step 4 Stop drilling when the mark on the side of the bit reaches the floor level 7 Inserta concrete floor anchor STARR part number 3425 into the hole until the mark on the bit reaches floor level again Snap the top of the anchor bit off Repeat for the remaining holes 8 A 3 8 16 threaded rod part number 845557073 is used to secure the media gateway to each concrete floor anchor See Earthquake Mounting Raised Computer Floor on page 70 Measure the distance from 1 of the anchors to the bottom of the media gateway Add 1 2 in 1 3 cm to this measurement to allow the rod to be threaded into the floor anchor Add an additional 1 2 in 1 3 cm to allow the rod to protrude up through the bottom of the media gateway For example if the distance from the floor anchor to the bottom of the media gateway is 10 in 25 cm cut the threaded rod 11 in 27 9 cm long October 2002 70 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 9 When all 4 threaded rods are cut replace the raised floor panels removed in Step 5 10 Position the media gateway over the holes and adjust the leveling legs until the media gateway is level gt NOTE If the
240. o the DS1 circuit pack and taps off the input for the Stratum 3 Clock A resistor built into the cable to provide the necessary isolation between the 8700 Multi Connect configuration and the clock The Y cable plugs directly into the CSU and connects to standard cables for interface to the S8700 Multi Connect configuration and the yellow field on the MDF The H600 307 cable connects the 8700 Multi Connect configuration end of the Y cable to a DS1 circuit pack shown as TN464 2464 TN722 or TN767 The B25A cable connects the clock end of the Y cable to the yellow field on the MDF Typical Connections to Stratum 3 Clock amp GO Del Oo M 9 cydfst3 LJK 101596 October 2002 134 Install the Stratum 3 clock Figure notes 1 oN O oa 5h WO DN SCCI Cabinet PN 9 A Position 10 B Position 11 H600 307 Cable 12 H600 247 G2 Cable 13 1300 Feet 396 m 14 B25A Male to Female Cable 15 Channel Service Unit Secondary Channel Service Unit Primary Stratum 3 Clock Main Distribution Frame MDF DS1 E1 Interface Circuit Pack DS1 Tie Trunk Circuit Pack DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Tone Clock Circuit Pack October 2002 Install the Stratum 3 clock Install the Stratum 3 Clock Wiring 1 Connect the B25A cables from the TN780 connector panel
241. og Modular 8400 Series 8400 Series speaker Station Plug 606A1 603E phone Modem NT1 1 TXT 2 TXR T 3 PXT TXT R 4 T PXR T October 2002 251 252 Installing and Wiring Telephones Port Circuit Pack and Telephone Pin Designations Continued 8510T BRI Pin on 4 wire 2 wire 302D with adjunct Analog Modular 8400 Series 8400 Series speaker Station Plug 606A1 603E phone Modem NT1 5 R PXT No R 6 PXR TXR Connection 4 pin 7 48VDC 48VDC 48VDC modular jack 48VDC 8 GRD GRD GRD GRD Circuit TN754C TN2181 TN556D TN2183 TN2198 Pack 4 wire 2 wire digital ISDN BRI Analog line 2 wire BRI digital 16 port line 16 port line 8 port TN2224 2 wire digital 24 port PX PBX transmit T Tip A TX Terminaltransmit R Ring B Three Pair and Four Pair Modularity 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity on page 253 is from the port circuit pack to the voice or data terminal Most terminals connect to an information outlet modular jack installed at the work location Make the connections from the port circuit pack to the modular jacks as shown in 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity on page 253 Then plug the terminal into the modular jack Adjunct Power Connection Locations on page 253 shows three methods of connecting adjunct power October 2002 253 Installing and Wiring Telephones 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity 9 9 26 1 k
242. omputer connected to the active media server and uses Avaya Site Administration gt NOTE A cabinet may be either an MCC1 media gateway or an SCC1 Media Gateway 1 Type add cabinet number 1 through 64 and press Enter for each media gateway October 2002 60 Customizing the Active Media Server 2 Fill in the appropriate carrier types for each media gateway faa cabinet 1 N CABINET CABINET DESCRIPTION Cabinet 1 Cabinet Layout five carrier Cabinet Type expansion portnetwork Number of Portnetworks 1 Survivable Remote EPN n Location 1 Cabinet Holdover A carrier only Room Floor Building CARRIER DESCRIPTION Carrier Carrier Type Number Duplicate Cc not used PN 01 B port PN 01 A expansion control PN 01 X Fan D not used PN 01 E switch node SN 01 03E Administer and Enable the IP Media Server Interface gt NOTE Do this procedure only if the translations were not input earlier The following administration uses the services laptop computer connected to the active media server and uses Avaya Site Administration gt NOTE This procedure enables the IPSI circuit packs and allows them to control the port networks 1 Type change system parameters ipserver interface and press Enter m System parameters ipserver interface Page 1 of es IP SERVER INTERFACE IPSI SYSTEM PARAMETERS SERVER INFORMATION IPSI Host Name Prefix vodka Primary Control Subnet Address 198 152 254 Sec
243. on interface LEDs 327 LEDs 326 C LAN administering 219 test external connection to LAN 220 C LAN connection testing 316 closets site locations 160 CO trunk wiring 243 collocated DS1 tie trunks wiring 246 command line interface 301 concentrator cables connecting trunk pairs 178 concrete floor mounting 68 103 conductor coupled bonding 158 configure Cajun P333T Ethernet switch 55 configure media server 1 27 configure media server 2 43 configure UPS 51 connect UPS to Ethernet switch 50 connect AC power 119 connect duplication cables 43 connect to customer LAN 215 connect to customer network 215 connectable voice and data terminals 170 connecting AC power 80 87 connecting battery leads 76 connecting cabinet grounds 83 connecting control carrier outputs cable 177 connecting DC battery and power cabinet grounds 86 connecting DC power 110 connecting DC power to cabinets 88 connecting external alarm cable 93 connecting external alarm indicators 257 connecting fiber optic cable 95 critical reliability CSS system 97 high reliability CSS system 96 standard reliability CSS system 95 connecting ground wires DC systems 87 connecting large battery holdover 78 connecting mixed AC DC power and ground 89 connecting remote power off cable 90 connecting small battery holdover 77 connection diagrams station cables 165 October 2002 connections ITS network 224 connector 259A 217 console
244. ondary Control Subnet Address 198 152 255 oo OPTIONS Switch Identifier A IPSI Control of Port Networks enabled s P 2 Verify that the Primary and Secondary Subnet Addresses are correct October 2002 61 Customizing the Active Media Server The subnet addresses must match the most significant 3 octets the first 3 groups of digits in the subnet address of the Server IP address filled in on the control network entry from the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S amp 700 Media Server An Asterisk to the right of the Subnet Address field means that although a subnet address is displayed it is not the correct one the Avaya MultiVantage call processing software does not have the subnet information After verifying the displayed information submit this form with or without changes to update the Avaya Multi Vantage software with the correct subnet information A CAUTION If the information displayed in the Primary and or Secondary Subnet Address fields is not correct it must be changed on the media servers Use the Configure Server entry on the Web Interface application to change the media server configuration Then return here to perform this step 3 Setthe Switch Identifier field to the switch ID letter A thru J A is the default setting 4 Setthe IPSI Control of Port Networks field to enabled 5 Press Enter to effect the change Add IPSI Translations to Mult
245. onnector See Power Distribution Unit J58890CH on page 79 2 Connectthe 48 VDC RETURN cable to the ground terminal block 3 Connectthe temperature sensor cable from the battery media gateway to J20 gt NOTE An adapter cable may be required when connecting the temperature sensor cable to the J58890CH unit See Temperature Sensor Cable Adapter Cables on page 79 October 2002 79 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Power Distribution Unit J58890CH pedf010 KLC 020599 Figure notes 1 Connect small battery holdover cable or temperature sensor cable from large battery media gateway to J20 2 Carrier Circuit Breakers 3 Ground Terminal Block 4 Connect 48 VDC Return 1 AWG 50 mm red cable here 5 Connect 48 VDC 1 AWG 50 mm black cable 6 1AWG 50 mm 50 ft 15 2 m cable to large battery media gateway For cables greater than 50 ft 15 2 m contact your Avaya representative 7 Ground Terminal Block 8 To AC load center or approved single point ground block Temperature Sensor Cable Adapter Cables H600 476 Adapter Cable Usage Group 1 G1 24 cell customer provided battery Group 3 G3 included 24 cell Avaya battery with battery media gateway October 2002 80 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect Shorting Cable to J58890CE 2 A CAUTION For a media gateway with a battery charger read the caution label on the 397C battery charger bef
246. open the Run dialog box 12 Type command to open an MS DOS command window 13 Type ping serverIname where serverIname is the host name of media server 1 if DNS is administered 14 Verify that the ping was successful 15 Type ping serverlipaddress where server lipaddress is the IP address of media server 1 16 Verify that the ping was successful 17 Ifyou checked icmp earlier it was not a default setting uncheck both boxes to the left of it and click Set Security Test Media Server 1 LEDs The following administration uses the services laptop computer connected to media server 1 and the media server Web interface October 2002 41 Configure Media Server 1 1 Under Diagnostics click Test Server LEDs to test the media server LEDs 2 Observe the Active Standby and U2 LEDs on the front of the media server and the transmit LED on the duplication card on the back of the media server to ensure they are blinking The blinking stops after about a minute See S8700 Media Server LEDs on page 319 for more specific information Configure SNMP Traps The following administration uses the computer used to access media server 1 and uses the media server Web interface gt NOTE Configure trap destinations only if the customer s network administrator wants alarm notification Refer to the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S8700 Media Server for host names IP addresses and community strings assig
247. optional 26A1 or 24A1 selector console derive their power from an auxiliary power source Of the maximum of 27 attendant consoles 3 of the consoles can derive auxiliary power from the media gateway and through the auxiliary cable located in the trunk auxiliary field Provide auxiliary power for a primary attendant console through this cable so the console remains fully operational during short power outages An attendant console can also derive auxiliary power from Individual 1151A1 or 1151A2 power supply e 258A type adapters Bulk power supplies such as the 1145B2 A console s maximum distance from its auxiliary power source is 800 feet 244 meters for a 302A1 350 feet 107 meters for a 301B1 and 302D October 2002 256 Installing and Wiring Telephones Hard Wire Bridging Analog type hard wire bridging is not allowed for any DCP endpoints Hard wire bridging provides no way of combining the digital output of two bridged DCP sets Also a bridged endpoint causes degradation of the DCP signal A CAUTION Bridging or paralleling these endpoints can cause electrical damage to the consoles or cause the circuit pack to remove power from the consoles Dual Wiring of 2 Wire and 4 Wire Endpoints Do not simultaneously wire a 2 wire and 4 wire endpoint to the same equipment location in an MDF The Avaya configurations use separate circuit packs to interface 2 and 4 wire endpoints Install the Attendant Console 1 Install the atte
248. order to establish the correct 3 pair modularity Equipment Room Cabling Labels 9 e A o Figure notes 1 Purple Label Port Cable 3 Yellow Label Auxiliary 2 Blue Yellow Label Building 4 Blue Yellow Label Site or and Floor Satellite Equipment Room Labels Label Name Range Port Cable 1A1 1A20 1B1 1B20 1C1 1C20 1D1 1D20 1E1 1E20 Building Field Identified Floor Field Identified Auxiliary Cable Field Identified Site or Satellite A F and or Field Identified October 2002 156 Cable Installation Cable Connector Building Label Ordering Information Description Quantity Comcode 201A Labels 34 Sheets 103969994 Self Stick Label on 25 Pair Cable Connector BB M E AZ Ibdf25p LJK 101596 Cable Routing to Top Terminal Blocks r758424b MMR 052996 Figure notes 1 Main Distribution Frame 2 AC Power Cord AC Powered Media Gateways Only Cable Slack Manager Number 2 Cable Slack Manager Number 3 O ON Oo Media Gateway s 3 Cable Slack Manager Number 1 To Building Cables A nA 10 10 AWG 25 6 mm Wire to 5 Station Distribution Field Coupled Bonding Conductor October 2002 Cable Installation Cable Routing to Bottom Terminal Blocks Figure notes 1 Main Distribution Frame 6 2 AC Power Cord AC Powered Media 7 Gateways Only 8 3 Cable Slack Manager Number 1 9 4 Trunk Auxiliary Field 5 Station Distributio
249. ore disconnecting batteries Some media gateways contain a J58890CE 2 AC Power Distribution Unit without an optional battery charger Install the shorting cable only when a battery charger is not installed If you do not install the shorting cable or a battery charger then an alarm appears 1 Set the circuit breakers on the power distribution unit OFF See Shorting Cable Installation on page 80 2 Atthe rear of the media gateway insert the shorting cable H600 442 G1 into J11 The cable is keyed so it can fit only 1 way Shorting Cable Installation psdfsht KLC 111296 Figure notes 1 Shorting Cable H600 442 G1 if battery charger is not installed 2 Jil Connect AC Power 1 Set the main circuit breakers on the power distribution unit OFF 2 Connect media gateway AC line cords to the AC power receptacles gt NOTE Do not power up the 8700 Multi Connect configuration at this time October 2002 81 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect DC Power and Ground CAUTION Grounding of the 8700 Multi Connect configuration shall comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70 For more information refer to Approved Grounds lli The grounding methods for the DC powered 8700 Multi Connect configuration are more complex than that of an AC powered 8700 Multi Connect configuration Typical Power and Ground for a DC po
250. ou are given or leave blank SettheNet Region field to 1 unless you are given a different number e Setthe Enable Eth Pt field to y 7 Press Enter to save the information and effect the new settings Refer to the Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software for more information on these administration steps and for the steps to administer IP Softphones and H 323 trunks Test the External Connection to the LAN To test the external IP connections ping the IP Media Processor server and ping a known computer connected to the network If everything is configured correctly the Result column on the Ping Results screen reads pass If it reads abort verify the IP address information and check the connectivity including the cabling 1 Type ping ip address JPaddress board UUCSS and press Enter The variable Paddress is the IP address of the TN2302AP IP Media Processor and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN2302AP IP Media Processor eino ip address 192 168 10 21 A PING RESULTS End pt IP Port Port Type Result Time ms Error Code 19241084 10 21 01A13 MEDPRO PASS 10 1124 Ne Type ping ip address IPaddress board UUCSS and press Enter The variable Paddress is the IP address of the customer s gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN2302AP IP Media Processor 3 Type ping ip address IPaddress board UUCSS and press Enter The variable Paddress is the IP address of another
251. ounding an AC Powered Media Gateway J58890CE Grounding is relatively simple for an AC powered media gateway Basically the media gateways connect to the single point ground terminal block located at either the AC load center or to a separate single point ground block wired to the AC load center or optional AC protector media gateway The approved ground wire must be a green or green with yellow stripe 6 AWG 40 16 mm copper stranded wire Bond all approved grounds at the single point ground to form a single grounding electrode system Ground AC Load Center 50 ft 15 2 m or Less from Media Gateway At the bottom rear of the first media gateway connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm media gateway GROUND wire to the media gateway ground terminal block See Typical Route the media gateway GROUND wire to the single point ground block at the AC load 1 Media Gateway Ground Location on page 74 2 center and connect 3 At the bottom rear of the next media gateway if provided connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm media gateway GROUND wire to the media gateway ground terminal block October 2002 74 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 4 Routethe media gateway GROUND wire to the single point ground block at the AC load center and connect gt NOTE If the media gateway is located remotely in a separate room or building connect the media gateway GROUND wire to an approved ground 5 Repeat connecting each
252. p 126 cabinet ground 106 cabinet grounds 71 117 cabinet grounds connecting 83 cabinet location auxiliary cabinet 67 EPN cabinets 103 PPN cabinet 67 103 cabinet cabling to MDF 181 cabinets attaching to floor 69 connecting DC pewer 88 cabinets stabilizing for earthquake protection 123 124 cable fiber optic 127 cable clamps 187 cable clamps for cable slack manager 159 cable installation control carrier outputs 154 cable routing guidelines 154 cable routing MDF 154 cable slack manager installing 187 cable slack manager space requirements 159 cable attendant console cabling distances 254 cable inter cabinet 119 cable TDM bus 119 cables 25 pair I O 159 187 connect Ethernet cables to IPSI 193 fiber optic 94 inter cabinet 127 outputs for control carrier 249 cables installing 153 cables installing between auxiliary cabinet and MDF 181 cables installing between cabinet and MDF 181 cabling installing trunk cables 155 provisioning plan 143 cabling labels 153 cabling layout 173 Cajun P333T Ethernet switch configuring 55 LEDs 321 security alert 55 calling queue 277 carbon block protectors off premises connections 263 CE marks 4 check commercial power 94 checking circuit pack configuration 308 checking system status 307 circuit pack configuration testing 308 circuit pack damage or discrepancies 66 102 circuit pack LEDs 318 circuit packs DS1 converter LEDs 327 duplicati
253. patch cord trough Repeat Steps 4 5 and 6 October 2002 184 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration 11 Ifinstalling another distribution field terminal block partially install the first screw for the terminal block on the line 7 8 in 2 2 cm to the right of the previous screw Partially install the second mounting screw 7 11 16 in 19 5 cm to right of the screw just installed Repeat Steps 4 5 and 6 12 Ifinstalling a vertical patch cord trough in the distribution field repeat Step 6 13 Repeat Steps 11 and 12 until all the terminal blocks and vertical patch cord troughs in the distribution field are installed 110A Type Terminal Blocks 300 Pair 1758420b MMR 031496 Figure notes 1 4ft 1 22m 6 47 5 in 120 6 cm 2 6 6 ft 2m 7 Horizontal Line 3 7 681n 19 5 cm 8 AC Power Strip 4 7 8 in 2 22 cm 9 Floor Line 5 5 31 in 13 5 cm October 2002 185 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration 110P Type Terminal Blocks 900 Pair 9 i r758421b MMR 031496 Figure notes 1 4ft 1 22m 6 7 8 in 2 22 cm 2 Horizontal Line 7 23in 58 4 cm 3 7 681n 19 5 cm 8 8ft 243m 4 47 51n 120 6 cm 9 AC Power Strip 5 5 31 in 13 5 cm 10 Floo
254. r is required to connect the power supply frame ground lug to an approved ground The frame ground screw is located next to the AC outlet to the left of the unit Mount the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit See the 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit in Expanded Power Distribution Unit on page 282 1 Insert and securely tighten the two supplied 8 32 x 1 2 inch shoulder screws they have an unthreaded section at the top into the top holes designated for 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit on the bottom plate Mount the unit on these two shoulder screws using the key holes on the back of the unit 2 Secure the unit by inserting the 8 32 x 1 inch screw through the bottom of the unit just above the wire clips into the plate and tighten 3 Setthe battery back up switch option to the 1 32 down position to provide battery back up to all outputs 4 Connect the power distribution unit to the power supply with the power cable Refer to the power supply s right hand label to locate the output power connection Install the Battery Mounting Wiring Three types of back up batteries are used See Back Up Battery Rating on page 284 for the battery type and rating 1 Insert two 10 32 x 1 2 inch shoulder screws into the top designated battery holes on the wall mounting plate Lightly screw in but do not tighten 2 Place the keyhole slots in the battery bracket on these two screws The battery cord exits from the right of the bracket Make sur
255. r Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension Trunk Auxiliary Field on page 275 October 2002 268 Installing and Wiring Telephones 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Figure notes EMERGENCY TRANSFER PANEL TRUNK TEST SWITCHES CIRCUIT TRUNK OPTION J 1 LOOP GROUND zj2 START START lt BOTH SWITCHES MUST BE THROWN TO ACTIVATE TRUNK OPTION TRANSFER TEST SWITCH ACTIVATED NORMAL OPERATION lt TRUNK IDENTIFICATION TRUNK LINE EXT LOG 1 808A Emergency Transfer Panel 3 2 Circuit Start Selection Switches 4 led808a LJK 040896 Trunk Identification Label 25 Pair Male Connector October 2002 269 Installing and Wiring Telephones 808A Emergency Transfer Panel Mounting 808a em LJK 042396 Figure notes 1 808A Emergency Transfer Panel 4 25 Pair Male Connector 2 Ear for Screw Mount 5 Circuit Start Switches 3 Cut Out for Snap Mount Install the 808A Emergency Transfer panel gt NOTE The 808A must be installed in a location that can be accessed only by authorized personnel The location must meet standard environmental considerations such as temperature humidity and so forth 1 Verify dial tone is present at each trunk circuit 2 Locate the circuit start selection switches see 808A Emergency Transfer Panel on page 268 These are the first 10 two position switche
256. r Line Mount 110P type terminal blocks on a frame The 900 pair 110P type terminal blocks and the associated patch cord troughs can also be mounted on a free standing floor mounted 1110A2 Apparatus Mounting Frame See 1110A2 and 1110C1 Apparatus Mountings on page 186 October 2002 186 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Each 1110A2 provides the space to mount 5 terminal blocks patch cord troughs on each side of the frame A cable support structure apparatus mounting 1110C1 mounts directly on top of the 1110A2 and provides support for all cables routed to and from the frame See Apparatus Mounting Frame Ordering Information on page 186 1110A2 and 1110C1 Apparatus Mountings 1781401 LJK 040896 Figure notes 1 1110C1 Apparatus Mounting 4 88 5in 225 cm 2 1110A2 Apparatus Mounting 5 43 5in 110 5 cm 3 76in 193 cm Apparatus Mounting Frame Ordering Information Code Number Description Comcode 1110A2 Apparatus Mounting Frame 104032495 1110C1 Cable Support Assembly 104175120 1110A1 End Dress Panel 104176268 2110A1 Top Dress Panel 104176276 2110B1 Bottom Dress Panel 104176284 October 2002 187 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Install Cable Slack Managers 1 Place the Z113A Cable Slack Manager against the wall under the MDF See Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager SCC on page 188 Align the left side of the cable slack manager with t
257. r and make a test call Test Integrated Announcement The TN750B C and TN2501AP Announcement circuit packs provide the ability to store messages The messages can be recorded from telephones on or off premises and have flexible October 2002 315 Testing the Complete Configuration message lengths The telephone selected as the test telephone must have a class of service COS with console permission enabled Record Announcement 1 Select a test telephone with console permissions enabled 2 Dialthe access code followed by the integrated announcement extension number 3 When you hear a dial tone press 1 When you hear a beep or stutter tone speak the announcement into the telephone 4 When done press if a digital phone or hang up if an analog phone to stop the recording You then hear a dial tone Playback Announcement 1 If using a digital phone press 2 to hear the announcement When the announcement is over you hear a dial tone If satisfied hang up 2 Ifusing an analog phone dial the integrated announcement extension number to hear the announcement When the announcement is over you hear a dial tone If satisfied hang up Delete Announcement 1 Dial the access code followed by the integrated announcement extension number 2 When you hear a dial tone press 3 to delete the announcement and end the recording session A confirmation tone is heard when the announcement is deleted Test Music on Hold Verify music is p
258. r cabinet on page 82 2 Route the ground wire out of the cabinet and terminate it on the approved ground The approved ground must be identified wi grounding tag FORM 15657NR or equivalent See Approved Grounds October 2002 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect AC Power to DC Power cabinet A CAUTION Power is present in the cabinet even if the AC power cable is unplugged Turn off the main circuit breaker on the front of the cabinet when procedures require ALL power to be removed from the cabinet 1 Ensure the associated circuit breakers at the AC power panel are OFF 2 Havean electrician connect AC power leads to the rectifiers using the instructions provided with the rectifiers in the DC Power cabinet Each rectifier should have its own branch circuit Terminate leads on the AC INPUT terminal block of each rectifier Connect Ground Wires for DC Power Systems A CAUTION Do not connect any ground wires between cabinets All ground wires must be terminated at the single point ground block at the main AC supply AC mains 1 Connect a6 AWG 40 16 mm wire to the first cabinet ground terminal block 2 Route the wire to the AC mains single point ground block and connect 3 Connecta 6 AWG 40 16 mm wire to the each of the other cabinets ground terminal block 4 Route the wire s to the AC mains single point ground block and connect 5 Connecta 6 AWG 40 wire to the DC battery cabinet and DC power ca
259. r configuration type on page 31 e Continue Server 1 configuration on page 33 e Install License and Avaya Authentication Files on page 37 Verify Media Server 1 Connection to Customer s LAN if provided on page 38 e Test Media Server 1 LEDs on page 40 e Configure SNMP Traps on page 41 The following administration uses the services laptop computer and the media server Web interface Connect the services laptop computer to the dedicated services port default is port 2 Eth1 on the back of the media servers using the black crossover cable gt NOTE Make sure you have the filled out job aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S amp 700 Media Server before beginning this process gt NOTE Make sure your networking and Web browser settings are correct Refer to the job aid entitled Pre Installation Information S8700 Media Server Power up media server 1 1 Plug the AC power cord for media server 1 into UPS 1 to power it up Refer to Getting Started with the Avaya 8700 Media Server with MCCI or SCCI Media Gateway Set product ID You must assign a product ID number to the configuration You can obtain this product ID number from the Automatic Registration Tool ART script 1 Click Start gt Run to open the Run dialog box Type telnet 192 11 13 6 and press Enter 2 3 Login as craft 4 Atthe prompt type productid p number and press Enter 5 Log
260. r to Getting Started with the Avaya 58700 Media Server with MCC1 or SCC1 Media Gateway 2 Plugthe laptop into port 2 Eth1 on the back of media server 2 using the black crossover cable On the services laptop click Start Run to open the Run dialog box 4 Type command and press Enter to open an MS DOS Command Line window Type arp d 192 11 13 6 and press Enter to clear the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache in the laptop This command will respond with one of the following The command line prompt when the cache has been cleared The phrase The specified entry was not found This is returned when the specified IP address does not currently contain an entry in the ARP cache Launch the Web browser 7 Type 192 11 13 6 in the Location Netscape or Address Internet Explorer field to bring up the Web interface 8 Loginas craft 9 When asked Do you want to suppress alarms select yes Verify Software Version gt NOTE The menu choices are in the left panel 1 Scroll down the menu to Server Configuration and Upgrades Miscellaneous Enable Disable Ethernet Switch Ports Upload Files to Server via browser Download Files to Server from web Server Configuration and Upgrades View Software Version Configure Server Install New Software Release Make Server Upgrade Permanent View Partiton Status Eject CD ROM Resetto Defaults 2 Click View Software Version Note the software ve
261. rap receiver IP address Community string get set trap Refer to the configuration section of the user guide that comes with the Ethernet switch for the default user ID password and configuration commands Use the following general procedures to administer the Ethernet switch es 1 Plug the Ethernet switch into a UPS Duplex reliability Ethernet switch 1 and 2 if equipped for Control Network A CNA into UPS 1 e High or critical reliability Ethernet switch 1 and 2 if equipped for CNA into UPS 1 and Ethernet switch 1 and 2 if equipped for CNB into UPS 2 2 Connectthe services laptop computer RS 232 serial port to the port labeled Console on the front of the first Ethernet switch CNA using the cable supplied with the Ethernet switch 3 Openaterminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal 4 Administer the terminal emulation port settings e 9600 bps rate e No parity e 8 bits e 1 stop bit 5 Log into the Ethernet switch with the appropriate login and password Refer to the user guide supplied with the Ethernet switch 6 Using the Command Line Interface CLI of the Ethernet switch set the following parameters P address and subnet mask of the Ethernet switch e IP address of the Trap Receiver For Ethernet switches in CNA this should be the IP address of Server 1 For Ethernet switches in CNB this should be the IP address of Server 2 Do not use the Active Server IP address October 2002 55
262. ressing the button associated with the LED If the LED is off and the alarm has not been resolved by the time maintenance reschedules testing the green status LED resumes its steady state IP Server Interface LEDs The TN2312AP IP Server Interface IPSI circuit pack LEDs are shown in TN2312AP circuit pack faceplate It also has a programmable LED display to indicate whether its IP address is dynamic shows media gateway location or static shows I P See LED display on the IPSI circuit pack static address October 2002 324 Testing the Complete Configuration TN23124AP circuit pack faceplate A20Z4mz mo zmo Figure notes a AB o N Slot for ribbon cable not used LED display Red LED Green LED Amber LED 6 7 8 9 ckdlipsi LIK 022402 Recessed programming button Yellow LED clock status Services Ethernet port Network Ethernet port October 2002 325 Testing the Complete Configuration LED display on the IPSI circuit pack static address ledlip1 KLC 030502 Figure notes 1 IPSI has a static IP address 2 IPSI has connectivity and an IP address The display also indicates connectivity see LED display indicating connectivity status October 2002 326 Testing the Complete Configuration LE
263. revents unexpected interchanges during the remainder of the installation 1 Under Server click Busy Out Server 2 Click Busy Out 3 UnderServer click View Summary Status and verify that media server is busied out Disconnect from the Media Server 1 Unplug the services laptop from media server 2 October 2002 50 Connect UPS Ethernet Cables to Ethernet Switch Connect UPS Ethernet Cables to Ethernet Switch Connect the CATS straight through cables from the UPS SNMP module to the Ethernet switch on the customer s network For a connectivity guide refer to Getting Started with the Avaya M 8700 Media Server with G600 Media Gateway or Getting Started with the Avaya 58700 Media Server with MCCI or SCCI Media Gateway October 2002 51 Configure the UPSs Configure the UPSs The following procedure is specific to the Powerware 9125 equipped with a ConnectUPS SNMP Module If a different UPS is used refer to its accompanying documentation to set the IP Address Subnet mask trap receiver IP address and community strings The SNMP module in the UPS must be administered so it can report alarm conditions to the appropriate media server when the hardware experiences problems The module reports the loss of commercial power and or the depletion of battery resources Ad WARNING It is critical that each UPS report SNMP traps to the server it is powering For example server 1 should be plugged into UPS 1 and UPS 1 mus
264. rforms as warranted These compromises may become more acute if you fail to follow Avaya s recommendations for configuration operation and use of the equipment YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU ARE AWARE OF THESE RISKS AND THAT YOU HAVE DETERMINED THEY ARE ACCEPTABLE FOR YOUR APPLICATION OF THE EQUIP MENT YOU ALSO ACKNOWLEDGE THAT UNLESS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN ANOTHER AGREEMENT YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR 1 ENSURING THAT YOUR NETWORKS AND SYSTEMS ARE ADEQUATELY SECURED AGAINST UNAUTHORIZED INTRUSION AND 2 BACKING UP YOUR DATA AND FILES Standards Compliance Avaya Inc is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substi tution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Avaya Inc The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modifications substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user Pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Com munications Commission FCC Rules the user is cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Avaya Inc could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Product Safety Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following interna tional Product Safety standards as applicable Safety of Information Technology Equipment IEC 60950 3rd Edition including all relevant national deviations as listed in Compliance with IEC for Electric
265. rge battery cabinet For cables greater than 50 ft 15 2 m contact your Avaya representative Ground Terminal Block To AC load center or approved single point ground block October 2002 85 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Typical Media Gateway Grounding Wiring Diagram widfspgb KLC 100297 Figure notes 1 First Media Gateway Additional Media Gateways if installed 6 AWG 40 16 mm2 Media Gateway GROUND Wire Single Point Ground Block 6 AWG 40 16 4 mm2 Ground Wire Wire to Approved Ground AC Load Center Single Point Ground Over 50 ft 15 2 m 9 ON Oo Oo 5 WO I Media Gateway Ground Terminal Block October 2002 86 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Install Coupled Bonding Conductor Wires This is a conductor that connects to the single point ground block and runs adjacent to pairs in an associated cable The mutual coupling between the CBC and the pairs reduces potential differences in terminating equipment The conductor consists of a 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire terminated at the CBC ground terminal bar at the Main Distribution Frame MDF 1 Atthe DC power cabinet connect a 10 AWG 25 6 mm ground wire to the Ground Discharge Bar See Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet on page 82 2 Routethe 10 AWG 25 6 mm ground wire to the CBC ground terminal bar at the MDF Be sure a minimum of 12
266. ritical Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 98 shows typical fiber optic cabling between media gateways The cable between port slots 1 and 2 on each switch node is a metallic cable H600 278 Connect the 2 groups of 1 to 15 cables between PN1 and each of the other PNs in an alternating port slot order 20 3 19 4 18 5 and so forth October 2002 97 98 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Critical Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node Figure notes 9 9 c LUU NW C UUU NNN B MMMU Ww B NNW a OOCUQOOUDQUUCUUDU AOUDACUCUDACUDAQUQUUL hd bal nal iu ha hd hu hal Bl db bh pf fp QQQQQQQR Q JV Wararararararg e A phhphh hh 99 Ug m DIES LUU NSSSSSS LUU NSSSSSSS cadferr KLC 031202 1 Media Gateway 1 PNI with 1 Duplex Switch Node 2 Port Network 2 through 16 3 H600 278 Metallic Cable 4 To other Port Networks October 2002 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack 99 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack This section describes how to install Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway stacks Typical Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway stack on page 99 shows a typical Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway stack Typical Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway stack
267. rity Set LAN Security Check to enable services for Customer LAN interface Unchecked services will be disabled WARNING Some network services are required for proper operation of or access to the server See About This Screen for details Please wait Input Output to from Service Port Protocol Server Server Iv Iv ftp 21 tcp Iv Iv ssh 22itcp Iv Iv telnet 23ftcp O O smtp 25 tcp Iv Iv WAT 8O tcp Iv Iv ntp 123 udp Iv Iv https 443 tcp O 0 icmp Oficmp Set Security Advanced Setting About This Screen 3 If icmp is not checked check both boxes to the left and click Set Security October 2002 40 Configure Media Server 1 4 Under Diagnostics click Execute Ping Execute Ping Select Host or IP address to Ping Select the following options Do not look up symbolic names for host addresses Bypass normal routing tables and send directly to a host Execute Ping About This Screen N o foe 9 10 Type in the IP address of a computer on the network Click Execute Ping Verify that the ping was successful indicating that the media server is connected to the customer s network Type in the host name if DNS is administered of a computer on the network Click Execute Ping Verify that the ping was successful indicating that DNS is working If available have a customer representative do the following test from a computer on their network 11 Click Start gt Run to
268. rmation Outlet Modular Jack 4 Pair D Inside Wire DIW Cable Satellite Site or Adapter Location 25 Pair D Inside Wire DIW Cable N Oo 0 FF O Station Side of Main Distribution Frame MDF 10 11 13 14 cydfadjn KLC 020599 100P6A Patch Cord or Jumpers Media Gateway Side of Main Distribution Frame MDF 25 Pair Cable to Media Gateway Analog Line Circuit Pack Equipment Room Satellite Location Work Location Bulk Power Supply such as 1145B Attendant Console Example Task List Attendant Console Procedures Install the Attendant Console on page 256 e Install the 26B1 Selector Console on page 256 Attendant Console Cabling Distances Local and Phantom Power A console s maximum distance from the media gateway is limited The maximum distance for a 302D console is as shown in Attendant Console Cabling Distances on page 255 October 2002 255 Installing and Wiring Telephones Attendant Console Cabling Distances 24 AWG Wire 26 AWG Wire Enhanced Attendant Console 0 5106 mm 0 4049 mm 302D Feet Meters Feet Meters With Selector Console Phantom powered 800 244 500 152 Locally powered 5000 1524 3400 1037 Without Selector Console Phantom powered 1400 427 900 274 Locally powered 5000 1524 3400 1037 Auxiliary Power A CAUTION Do not use the 329A power unit for the attendant console The nonessential functions of an attendant console and its
269. rmation on configuring the control network components installing the G600 Media Gateways and telephones testing and troubleshooting The following job aids available on the Avaya 88300 and S8700 Media Server Library CD 555 233 825 Approved Grounds job aid providing description of all approved grounds Connector and Cable Diagrams Pinout Charts job aid providing diagrams for various components Option Switch Settings job aid providing settings for various components Upgrading the Avaya 8700 Media Server part of the HTML library providing information on upgrading the AvayalM MultiVantage Software and firmware for various components and circuit packs October 2002 18 Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server with Avaya MCC1 or SCC1 Media Gateways Administration Guide for Network Connectivity documentation providing information on network connectivity Maintenance for the Avaya S8700 Media Server with G600 Media Gateway Volumes 1 3 555 233 142 documentation providing definitions of error codes and tests Software Release Letter for release 1 2 of Avaya Multi Vantage Software October 2002 document providing information on obtaining the current software release and patches that may need to be installed The following process is included in this installation procedure Pre installation Setup on page 19 High level overview of installation process on page 21 Mount the Har
270. rovided DC Power media gateway connect a 6 AWG 40 16 4 mm media gateway GROUND wire to the media gateway ground terminal block GROUND DISCHARGE bar 5 Route the media gateway GROUND wire to first media gateway and connect to the single point ground block and connect block gt NOTE If a media gateway is located remotely in a separate room or building route the media gateway media gateway GROUND wire to an approved protective ground 6 Repeat connecting each media gateway to the single point ground block Connect a 6 AWG 40 16 mm ground wire to an unused terminal on the single point ground block 8 Route the ground wire to the AC load center ground and connect October 2002 76 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Typical Media Gateway Grounding Wiring Diagram widfspgb KLC 100297 Figure notes 1 First Media Gateway 5 6AWG 40 164 mm Ground 2 Additional Media Gateways if Re peor ono installed 6 AC Load Center Single Point Ground 3 6 AWG 40 16 mm Media 7 Over 50 ft 15 2 m Gateway GROUND Wire 8 Media Gateway Ground Terminal 4 Single Point Ground Block Block Connect Battery Leads J58890CH 1 Typical Small Battery Assembly on page 77 shows a typical optional small battery holdover assembly These assemblies may ship with the battery leads disconnected to prevent the batteries from discharging
271. rovided to a held party during any hold interval Test Emergency Transfer 88700 Multi Connect only Put configuration in emergency transfer mode and make call using emergency transfer telephone There may be up to 4 Emergency Transfer panels on a wall in the phone closet depending on the configuration Test Remote Access Interface Test the communication link between the media server and the remote access interface and verify the alarm notification process Make a remote test from the remote interface to the Avaya 8700 Media Server and a local test from the Avaya 8700 Media Server to the remote interface In some countries this remote access interface is not allowed Contact your Avaya representative October 2002 316 Testing the Complete Configuration Test Terminating Trunk Transmission The Terminating Trunk Transmission Test provides for extension number access to 3 tone sequences that can be used for trunk transmission testing from the distant end of the trunks 1 Type change system parameters maintenance and press Enter and go to screen 2 2 Under TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST Extension type in 3 extension numbers in the 3 fields provided Test Type 100 Test Type 102 Test Type 105 Test Type Test Features Test type 100 5 5 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0 dB Quiet until disconnect disconnect is forced after 1 minute Test Type 9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0 dB 102 1 second of silence Cycle
272. rsion displayed and compare it to the required version check against the Software Release Letter that comes with the software CD October 2002 45 Configure Media Server 2 If the software version resident on the server is equivalent to the required version the server will not require a software upgrade during initial installation If the software version resident on the server is older than the required version you must upgrade the software on the S8700 Media Server Set server configuration type When a server is first initialized and configured it is necessary to set the configuration type IP Connect or Multi Connect Refer to the filled out Pre Installation Network Planning Forms S amp 700 Media Server for the proper configuration type information 1 Under Server Configuration and Upgrades click Configure Server to open the first page of the Configure Server process gt NOTE For help with any of the Web pages click About This Screen on the Web page or Help at the top of the main menu 2 Select Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect configuration and click Continue Configure Server Progress Select server type Review Notices Copy Settings The server type for this server is not set Select which type of JE server this is Set Identities Configure Interfaces Avaya S8700 Media Server for Multi Connect configuration Configure Switches Set DNS DHCP C Avaya S8700 Media Server for IP Connect configur
273. rt Media Gateway Address Plugs 121 Install Rear Panels 122 Install Rear Ground Plates Media Gateways with Earthquake Protection 123 October 2002 Install Front Ground Plates Media Gateways with Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Radiation Shielding and Earthquake Protection 124 Install Media Gateway Clips Media Gateways without Earthquake Protection 126 Connect S8700 Multi Connect configuration Cables 127 Install the Stratum 3 clock 129 Unpack and Inspect Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 129 Install and Position Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 129 Connect AC Power to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 129 Check and Connect Commercial AC Power 130 Connect DC Power and Ground to Stratum 3 Clock Cabinet 130 Connect Clock Cabinet Grounding 131 Connect Stratum 3 Clock DC Power 131 Set the Clock Options 131 Cable the Stratum 3 Clock 133 Install the Stratum 3 Clock Wiring 135 Installing the Avaya G700 Media Gateway 139 Cabling Media Gateways 141 Information about Installing the Cabling 141 Installing the Telecommunications Cabling 142 Provisioning Plan 143 Main Distribution Frame MDF Hardware 144 MDF Cross Connect Fields 147 Main Distribution Frame 148 Main Distribution Frame Labels 150 Off Premises Circuit Protection 151 Sneak Fuse Panels 152 Cable Installation 153 Equipment Room Cabling Labels 153 Cable Routing Guidelines 154 Control Carrier Outputs Cable Inst
274. ry On Discharge positive 11 BOD2 Battery On Discharge negative 37 Not Used 12 RXD Receive Data 38 TXD Transmit Data 13 DTR Data Terminal Ready 39 RS 232 GRD RS232 Ground 14 DSR Data Set Ready 40 RTS Request To Send 15 Not Used 41 Not Used October 2002 259 260 Installing and Wiring Telephones External Alarm Connector Pinout Continued Pin Designation Definition 16 Not Used 42 Not Used 17 Not Used 43 Not Used 18 Not Used 44 Not Used 19 Not Used 45 Not Used 20 Not Used 46 Not Used 2l Not Used 47 Not Used 22 Not Used 48 Not Used 23 Not Used 49 Not Used 24 Not Used 50 Not Used 25 Not Used Install Off Premises Station Wiring The local telephone company provides cabling outside the building for off premises stations The off premises stations can appear on any of the RJ21X network interfaces provided for the Central Office CO trunks CAUTION Only an FCC approved or equivalent analog type telephone such as a 2500 type can be used as an off premises station The TN746B and TN2183 Analog Line circuit packs can be connected to off premises stations Install an A25D male to male cable between the RJ21X network interface and a sneak fuse panel At the Main Distribution Frame MDF connect jumper wires between one row connecting block in the green field and up to three rows connecting blocks in the purple field to concentrate the analog line pairs October
275. s 1 6AWG 40 4 mm2 Wire Expansion Control Media Gateway A Single Point Ground Block 2 3 4 To Additional Expansion Control Media Gateways in Same Room 5 DC Power Cabinet 6 Ground Discharge Bar Connect DC Power Use the procedures in the following task list to connect DC power Connect the DC power e Connect AC Power to DC Power Cabinet on page 114 e Connect Battery Cabinet on page 115 e Connect Optional Battery Leads on page 116 October 2002 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Making DC Power Connections A 30 foot 9 m cable connects to each cabinet A special connector on one end of the cable is plugged into the cabinet power connector The cable must be cut to length and terminated inside the J58890R DC power cabinet Each rectifier assembly can supply up to 50 amps of DC current A minimum of two rectifiers are installed in each DC power cabinet to supply a total of 100 amps A third rectifier assembly can be installed and is used as a backup N 1 Each cabinet can pull up to 18 amps Up to 3 DC power cabinets can be stacked to supply power to media gateway stacks Typical DC Power Connections on page 112 shows a typical power and ground layout for a DC power system without a J58890CG DC Power Distribution Unit The J58890CG is required if the distance between the DC Power cabinet s is greater than 30 feet 9 m Connections Using DC Power Distribution Unit on page 113
276. s Alarms Alarms Faults Leads n n 0 0 UN October 2002 308 Testing the Complete Configuration Check Circuit Pack Configuration The list configuration report provides a list of circuit packs connected to the configuration and recognized by the software 1 2 Type list configuration all and press Enter Verify the screen displays list configuration similar to Sample System Configuration Screen Page 4 8700 Multi Connect Make sure the software is communicating with each circuit pack except power supply circuit packs Do not attempt to correct any problems until after the diagnostic tests that you run later in the configuration tests Note any boards with a VINTAGE column entry of NO BOARD or CONFLICT A u indicates unassigned ports and a number indicates the port has been translated Sample System Configuration Screen Page 4 S8700 Multi Connect list configuration all Page a SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Assigned Ports Number Board Type Code Vintage u unassigned t tti p psa 01B01 IP SERVER INTFC TN2312AP HW33 FWO45 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01B02 EXPANSION INTRFC TN570C 000002 01B03 DS NTERFACE TN464F 000020 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 9 10 11 l2 13 14 15 16 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 26 27 28 29 30 31 u 01B05 DS NTERFACE TN464F 000020 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 9 190 11 Iz 13 14 15 16 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 26 27 28 29 30 31 u 01B06 DS NTERFACE TN464F 000006 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 0
277. s on the left side of the Emergency Transfer Panel They are used to set each of the five incoming trunk lines to either loop start or ground start Two switches are used for each circuit switches 1 and 2 are used for circuit 1 switches 3 and 4 are used for circuit 2 and so forth See Trunk Test Switches on page 270 3 Forloop start set the switches to the left For ground start set the switches to the right 4 Connect a 25 pair cable between the male RJ21 25 pair connector on the Emergency Transfer Panel and the yellow field of the Main Distribution Frame MDF Pin Assignments for 25 Pair Connector on page 271 shows the pinouts October 2002 270 Installing and Wiring Telephones Make cross connections for each emergency trunk emergency station pair The 808A is connected to the Main Distribution Frame MDF by means of a B25A cable Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer on page 273 shows the connections at the trunk auxiliary field for a telephone used only for emergency transfer Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension on page 274 shows the connections at the trunk auxiliary field for a telephone used for emergency transfer as well as a normal extension On the trunk identification label at the bottom of the panel record the trunk line extension and location for each circuit To each telephone designated as an emergency terminal attac
278. s or interfering with one feature across the entire configuration e Warning Alarms Failures that cause no significant degradation of service or failures in equipment external to the configuration Warning alarms are not reported to the attendant console or INADS Alarms are communicated to users and technicians by entries in the alarm and sys logs and the lighting of LEDs located on the attendant console on all circuit packs and optionally on customer designated telephones More detailed information is available here for e S8700 Media Server LEDs Avaya Ethernet Switch LEDs e UPS LEDs October 2002 Attendant Console LEDs Terminal Alarm Notification Circuit Pack LEDs e DSI Converter Circuit Pack LEDs SPAN LEDs IP Server Interface LEDs S8700 Media Server LEDs Testing the Complete Configuration The media server has the LEDs shown in LEDs on front and back of media server LEDs on front and back of media server 9 9 STANDBY o OUOUOUUOUUUUUUUOUUO s 0000000000000000 oo 000000000000 000000 0000 oo 000000000000000000000000000000 c 00000000000000000000000000000000 1 000000000000000000000000000000 5 00000000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000 1 00000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000 SOE o ph OOl 999990900 Hu 2 m BESOSSESS CS o XL Vooo SS
279. s required between each pair of stacked media gateways At the front of the media gateways install a media gateway clip between each pair of media gateways by hooking the clip into the slot of the upper media gateway and snapping the straight leg of the clip into the slot on the lower media gateway See Location of Media Gateway Clips on page 126 Location of Media Gateway Clips scdfep2 KLC 101596 Figure notes 1 Expansion Control Media Gateway A 2 Port Media Gateway B 3 Port Media Gateway C 4 Port Media Gateway D 5 Media Gateway Clips October 2002 127 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Connect S8700 Multi Connect configuration Cables 1 Connect the cables for port networks PNs as shown in Connections for Media Gateway Stacks on page 120 gt NOTE The fiber optic cables are connected to the Main Distribution Frame MDF in Cabling Media Gateways on page 141 2 Connect the fiber optic cable The Inter Cabinet Cable Running List is provided with the 8700 Multi Connect configuration Each row on the list represents a cable connection Use the running list to determine where to connect each fiber optic cable CAUTION Do not route fiber optic cables and the B25A cables together October 2002 128 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack
280. search Favorites History Ehe Address Done ap Internet Z October 2002 29 Configure Media Server 1 gt NOTE The first time you attempt to log in you get a Web page asking you to install a security certificate Follow the instructions for your particular browser to accept the certificate You can also install the certificate on your services laptop computer by following the instructions in your browsers online help Using Netscape Follow the instructions in the New Site Certificate wizard Select Accept the certificate for this session New Site Certificate Netscape G October 2002 30 Configure Media Server 1 Using Internet Explorer Follow the instructions in the Security Alert wizard Security Alert 6 Loginas craft 7 When asked Do you want to suppress alarms select no Verify Software Version gt NOTE The menu choices are in the left panel 1 Scroll down the menu to Server Configuration and Upgrades Miscellaneous Enable Disable Ethernet Switch Ports Upload Files to Server via browser Download Files to Server from web Server Configuration and Upgrades View Software Version Configure Server Install New Software Release Make Server Upgrade Permanent View Partiton Status Eject CD ROM Resetto Defaults 2 Click View Software Version Note the software version displayed and compare it to the required version ch
281. sert concrete floor anchors STARR part number 3425 into the holes October 2002 69 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway 5 Roll the media gateway back into place and align the media gateway holes over the concrete floor anchors Adjust the leveling legs until the media gateway is level See Earthquake Mounting Raised Computer Floor on page 70 gt NOTE If the S8700 Multi Connect configuration is supplied with cable ductwork the media gateways must be level from front to rear and from side to side They must be square with respect to each other to within 1 8 in 0 3 cm 6 Securethe media gateway to the floor with the 4 supplied 3 8 16 x 4 5 in 11 4 cm bolts and four 3 8 in flat washers 7 Repeat this procedure for each media gateway to be installed Install Raised Computer Floor Mounting 1 Position the media gateway in the exact position it is to occupy when the installation is complete 2 Insert a pencil or marker through the holes previously occupied by the carriage bolts front and rear in the bottom of the media gateways and mark the raised floor panels directly beneath each hole 3 Rollthe media gateway out of the way and drill 4 holes 5 8 in 1 6 cm in diameter through the raised floor panels marked in Step 2 A CAUTION Take care while drilling the holes through the raised floor that the drill bit does not penetrate any cables below the floor that could cause damage to the cable or injury t
282. station button labels Required for network access to the Avaya S8700 Media Server AUDIX and other network connected systems One free serial port capable of 9600 bps operation is required for a connection to each serial device UPS We recommend that PCs have at least a 16550A UART or 16550A UART simulator capable of 56 kbps DTE speed connections USB and internal modems should emulate this hardware A second serial port is required for simultaneous connection to AUDIX through a serial connection You can download Avaya Site Administration to your computer two different ways from the Avaya Site Administration software CD or from the S8700 Media Server From the Avaya Site Administration CD Place the Avaya Site Administration software CD in the CD ROM drive and follow the installation instructions in the install wizard From the S8700 Media Server 1 Connect to one of the media servers either directly or through the network from the computer you want Avaya Site Administration to be installed on 2 Access the media server Web interface by typing in the Location Address field 192 11 13 6 direct connect or the IP address or the domain name of the media server over the network 3 Loginand get to the main menu 4 Under Telephony Administration click Download ASA to download Avaya Site Administration 1 11 to the computer 5 Follow the steps in the Setup wizard to install ASA on the computer gt NOTE The fol
283. t Normally Closed 1 Contact Common 2 Relay Contact Normally Open 2 Contact Ground from Aux Cable 48V from AUX Cable October 2002 273 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer le 2822 CA Pet et T T TC TK LC sT TC TK LC st rro 1 tc ST TC TK LC ST To Tk tc ST ioc 3 R fe 1 2 1M im 2M 2m 3M 8m 3w a ae a ALARM MONITORS EM TRANS RELAY PWR ACC PWR EEEEEENEEENENENEEEEEENEENENENENEEENEENENENENEEENENENEENNNENNENNNNNN 1758580b MMR 042996 Figure notes 1 To Network Interface Circuitry 4 ToPower Transfer Unit 2 To TN747B or Equivalent Central Office 5 To Control Carrier Auxiliary Trunk Circuit Pack Connector 3 To Blue or White Station Distribution Field October 2002 274 Installing and Wiring Telephones Connections for Telephone Used for Emergency Transfer and as Normal Extension m He ga E ile B ES iit 3 6 Em 4 B E my 5 H E m 6 H 6 mm 7 B ES mf 8 a jJ FL a E A EEE LLLE Cece O S E T TII 1M 1m 2M 2m BM 3m 3w ALARM MONITORS EM TRANS RELAY PWR POE 1758582b MMR 042996 Figure notes 1 To Network Interface Facility 4 ToTN747B or Equivalent Central 2 To Blue or White Station D
284. t IPSI is enabled IPSI does not have an IP address assigned to it IPSI has not been administered flashcard may be faulty replace it Installing the License and Avaya Authentication Files Problem Solution Can t get files from RFA site License file won t install Media server is in no license mode ASG doesn t work Can t place any calls Provided wrong SAP number Make sure there are not two license files on the server If so delete one of them May have corrupt file Download file again from RFA site If uploaded file using FTP uploaded in ASCII mode instead of binary mode Upload using binary mode Normal situation when license file is first installed because it cannot see the IPSIs they do not have IP addresses yet Re install Avaya authentication files Media server is in no license mode October 2002 334 Troubleshooting an Installation October 2002 Index Numerics 110A type terminal blocks SCC 148 110P type terminal blocks MCC 149 110P type terminal blocks frame mounting 185 110 type hardware 144 159 110 type hardware SCP 110 sneak current protection 152 110 type terminal blocks 148 110 type terminal blocks wall mounting 183 1110A2 apparatus mounting frame 185 1110C1 cable support 185 1145B power supply 278 282 1146B power distribution unit 283 285 1151A1 and 1151A2 power supply 287 288 1151A1 power supply 2
285. t Table should be empty If not in the following commands use a host table entry that is currently unassigned Type HI1 198 152 254 201 and press Enter Sets the trap destination for this UPS 1 Type TL 1 3 and press Enter Sets the trap level for the host All traps Type TT1 1 and press Enter Sets the trap type Standard UPS MIB defined Type HS and press Enter Verify the table entries Re displays the host table Type CF and press Enter Re displays the basic administration screen Type SA and press Enter Saves configuration and restarts module When completed disconnect the services laptop computer from the UPS Connect one end of a CAT5 cable to the RJ45 connector on the UPS 1 SNMP module and the other end to the next available port on an Ethernet switch for Control Network A CNA Repeat steps 5 thru 18 for the UPS 2 SNMP module Depending on the reliability configuration to be installed use the following address mask and gateway information Duplex Reliability Configurations For duplex reliability configurations use the following address and cable connection information gt NOTE For duplex reliability configurations there are two servers and two UPS units However there is only one control network The following entries provide addresses on CNA for UPS 2 UPS IPaddress Subnet mask 198 152 255 238 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway IP address 198 152 254 202 Host Table trap receiver IP address 198 152
286. t be configured to report SNMP traps to the server 1 IP address not the Active Server address The same required relationship holds true for server 2 and UPS 2 This is important because if the UPS detects loss of commercial power and or depletion of battery resources it will send a trap to allow the server to gracefully shutdown If the UPS sends the trap to the wrong server trap receiver address that server will shutdown while the server that is plugged into the UPS will fail due to loss of power Each UPS requires a unique IP address which can be a customer provided one or the Avaya provided default one Refer to the filled out Job Aid entitled Pre Installation Network Planning Form S8700 Media Server e 2 IP addresses 1 for each UPS 1 Default gateway IP address e Subnet mask Community name strings get set trap gt NOTE For the UPS to properly report alarm conditions the IP addresses for the UPS must be configured in the 8700 Media Servers SECURITY ALERT The Get and Set community name strings are generally configured with default values of Public and Private respectively These community name strings function as passwords for their respective SNMP operation It is always a good idea to change these community name strings to something other than the default values If a Network Management Station is in operation on the network whatever these values are changed to must be coordinated with its administrator I
287. t ground plate 124 October 2002 338 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect Index G G700 installing 139 ground coupled bonding conductor 73 117 coupled bonding connector 158 DC power distribution unit 108 frame ground 107 ground plate 123 124 ground wiring DC 81 ground cabinets 83 grounding planning 106 grounding DC cabinet 106 grounds connecting AC 71 117 installing on media server Avaya authentication file 38 license file 38 installing patch cords and jumpers 175 installing PPN cabinet 67 103 installing sneak fuse panels 188 installing the MDF 148 installing trunk cables 155 integrated announcement testing 314 integration process connecting ITS to the network 224 inter cabinet cables 119 127 IP address set static 208 use DHCP 206 IP Media Processor administration 225 installing 223 test external connection to LAN 227 H hardware configure 26 connecting 193 hardware MDF 144 high reliability systems cabling 127 IP network connection testing 316 IPSI administering 60 connect Ethernet cables 193 connect ribbon cables on SCC1 199 LEDs 323 program switch ID and cabinet 205 verify circuit pack version 211 ITW Linx enhanced protector 264 ITW Linx enhanced protector installing 265 I I O cables 187 information outlets wiring design 160 installation troubleshooting 331 installing Avaya G700 Media Gateway 139 Avaya Site Administration ASA
288. ted media servers Separated media servers Configure Media Server 2 Verify Software Version Set server configuration type Upgrade media server software if necessary Continue server 2 configuration Copy settings Configuring manually Update System Verify Media Server 2 Connection to Customer s LAN if provided Test Media Server 2 LEDs Busy Out Standby Media Server Disconnect from the Media Server Connect UPS Ethernet Cables to Ethernet Switch Configure the UPSs Duplex Reliability Configurations High critical reliability configurations Configure the Avaya Ethernet Switch if used Customizing the Active Media Server Set up Avaya Site Administration Directly through a dedicated services port Remotely over the network Starting Avaya Site Administration Input Translations Reset Media Server Add Media Gateways Administer and Enable the IP Media Server Interface Add IPSI Translations to MultiVantage Software Install the Media Gateways Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Unpack and Inspect Media Gateway October 2002 43 44 45 45 46 46 46 af 48 49 49 50 51 53 53 55 57 57 57 58 58 59 59 59 60 61 63 64 65 Installing the 88700 Multi Connect Unpa
289. teway to the Front Mounting Angle using the four supplied 12 24 x 1 2 inch 1 27 cm thread forming screws See Front Mounting Angle Location on page 105 Lay the supplied Stiffener on the bottom rear of the media gateway and align with the holes in the bottom of the media gateway See Media Gateway Earthquake Mounting Rear View on page 104 Slide a nylon washer onto each of the two supplied long hex head bolts Insert the bolts through the Stiffener and thread into the concrete floor anchor Tighten securely Media Gateway Earthquake Mounting Rear View 9 il 9 1781851a CJL 030796 October 2002 105 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Figure notes Media Gateway Media Gateway Foot Nylon Insulating Washer 2 Required Long Hex Head Bolt 2 Required Stiffener Floor Plugs Remove Concrete Floor Anchor N O QC Concrete Floor Front Mounting Angle Location 9 Il r781854a CJL 030896 Figure notes 1 0o 0 FF WO I 12 24x1 2 inch Thread Forming Screw Media Gateway A Front Mounting Angle Hex Head Bolt Nylon Insulating Washer Concrete Floor Concrete Floor Anchor October 2002 106 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Ground DC power media gateways CAUTION S8700 Multi Connect configuration grounding shall comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of
290. the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC This equipment has been certified to meet CTR3 Basic Rate Interface BRI and CTR4 Primary Rate Interface PRI and subsets thereof in CTR12 and CTR13 as applicable Copies of these Declarations of Conformity DoCs can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site http www avaya com support select Declarations of Conformity Japan This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Con trol Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment VCCI If this equipment is used in a domestic environment radio disturbance may occur in which case the user may be required to take corrective actions COREL HPL AE EME B ERMA VCCI Ose CESK 2 2A A TRIER CH COREE CHATS C BK HEL XMIFILLBHVEF COBSIIIEAFRBIRMRKEET SZEAGBRENSZIEBHVET To order copies of this and other documents Call Avaya Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 or 1 207 866 6701 FAX 1 800 457 1764 or 1 207 626 7269 Write Globalware Solutions 200 Ward Hill Avenue Haverhill MA 01835 USA Attention Avaya Account Management E mail totalware gwsmail com Contents Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server with Avaya MCC1 or Installing the 88700 Multi Connect S
291. the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the applicable code at the installation site gt NOTE Before connecting the media gateways approved ground determine the best method of grounding See Approved Grounds ttl for more information Also locate the approved ground as close to the media gateways as possible gt NOTE The ground plates and cabinet clips are installed later in this procedure Connect Ground to DC power cabinet Connect Ground for DC power cabinet on page 106 e Connect DC Power Distribution Unit Ground on page 108 e Connect DC Power Cabinet Ground on page 109 Connect Ground for DC power cabinet 1 Atthe DC power cabinet connect a 1 AWG 70 7 mm ground wire to the GROUND DISCHARGE bar See Grounding for DC power cabinet on page 107 2 Route the ground wire out of the cabinet and terminate it on the approved ground A CAUTION The approved ground must be connected using the correct gauge wire terminated with a listed clamp and identified with a grounding tag FORM 15657NR or equivalent October 2002 107 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Grounding for DC power cabinet dc rect RBP 051396 Figure notes 1 DC power cabinet 2 To Approved Ground 3 1 AWG 70 7 mm Wire 4 Ground Discharge Bar Connect DC Battery Frame Ground 1 C
292. the latch reaches the bottom rail of the carrier Then close the latch until it is fully engaged 1 Insert the TN2302AP IP Media Processor into the port slot you reserved for it and seat it properly See TN2302AP IP Interface faceplate on page 225 When you plug in the TN2302AP IP Media Processor the circuit pack starts to boot The RED LED stays on until an IP address is assigned to the circuit pack October 2002 225 Connecting to the Customer s Network TN2302AP IP Interface faceplate ckdfpro1 KLC 021201 Administer the IP Media Processor Use Avaya Site Administration for the administration 1 Loginas craft 2 Type list configuration all and press Enter to verify that the Multi Vantage software recognizes the TN2302AP circuit packs Type change node names and press Enter 4 On page 2 type in the node names and IP addresses for the TN2302AP October 2002 226 Connecting to the Customer s Network ER node names ip Page 1 of ON IP NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address cognac 12446 19 2 default O 20 20 40 medpro 92 168 82 prowler 92 168 83 prowlerl 12436 9 227 prowler2 72 16 9 1222 prowler3 72316 Os 2222 prowler4 72 16 9 224 prowler5 72 16 9 225 sriclanl 92 168 80 sriclan2 72 16 9 2220 traf clan 72 16 9 4418 12 of 12 administered node names were displayed NC list node names command to see all the administered nod
293. tiVantage software does not accept it 2 Connect the backplane adapter to the Amphenol connector on the back of the media gateway corresponding to the TN2501AP circuit pack slot 3 Connect the LAN CATS cable to the RJ45 connector on the backplane adapter October 2002 233 Connecting to the Customer s Network Administer the TN2501AP After you have installed the hardware to support an FTP session you must administer and test the installation Use Avaya Site Administration for this administration Verify circuit pack location 1 Type list configuration board board location and press Enter The System Configuration report appears Use this report to ensure that the Multi Vantage software recognizes the TN2501AP circuit pack after it is latched in the carrier slot ee configuration board 1c08 page 1 E SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Assigned Ports Number Board Type Code Vintage u unassigned t tti p psa 01C08 VAL ANNOUNCEMENT TN2501AP HWOO FWOO1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 T1 12 13 14 15 16 l4 18 119 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 U Noes successfully completed E 2 Verify the following field values Board Type shows VAL ANNOUNCEMENT e Code is TN2501AP Administer the node names 1 Type change node names ip and press Enter The IP Node Names screen appears Use this screen to administer the circuit pack s node name October 2002 234 Connecting to the Customer s Network ge node na
294. tion for Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Earthquake protection installs only on Avaya SCC1 media gateways 1 Position the expansion control media gateway A J58890N in the position it is to occupy when the installation is complete Be sure it is level 2 Usinga pencil or marker and using the Front Mounting Angle as a template mark the locations of the two floor mounting holes 3 Move the media gateway out of the way and drill a hole 0 5 inch 1 3 cm in diameter and 1 5 inches 3 8 cm deep at the locations marked in Step 2 4 Inserta concrete floor anchor STARR part number 3425 into each hole Secure the Front Mounting Angle to the floor using the short hex head bolts provided 6 Move the media gateway back into place October 2002 103 104 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack 10 11 12 13 14 15 At the rear of the media gateway remove the two hole plugs from the bottom of the media gateway See Media Gateway Earthquake Mounting Rear View on page 104 Insert a pencil or marker through the holes in the bottom of the media gateway and mark the floor directly beneath each hole Move the media gateway out of the way and drill a hole 0 5 inch 1 27 cm in diameter and 1 5 inches 3 8 cm deep at the locations marked in Step 10 Insert a concrete floor anchor STARR part number 3425 into each hole Move the media gateway back into place and align with the Front Mounting Angle Attach the media ga
295. tors off premises connections 263 264 sneak fuse panel space requirements 159 sneak fuse panels 152 159 sneak fuse panels installing 188 SNMP traps setting 41 space requirements 110 type hardware 159 cable slack manager 159 sneak fuse panels 159 SPAN LEDs 329 stabilizing cabinets for earthquake protection 123 124 standard reliability systems cabling 127 standards electromagnetic compatibility 3 static addressing IPSI circuit pack 205 static IP addressing setting 208 station cables sizing 173 station cables wiring design 160 station circuit distribution 165 Stratum 3 clock 129 cabling 133 checking AC power 130 connecting to DC power 130 131 cross connects high or critical reliability 135 standard reliability 135 grounding cabinet 131 installing 129 LED indicators 317 maximum cabling distance 135 setting options 131 testing LED indicators 317 wiring 135 Stratum 3 clock administering 317 Stratum 3 clock connecting AC power 129 Stratum 3 clock inspecting 129 Stratum 3 clock testing 317 Stratum 3 clock timing 317 System status checking 307 System test alarms 318 October 2002 T T1 CSU and DS1 tie trunk 246 T1 E1 status LEDs 329 TDM bus service state 307 TDM bus cables 119 TDM testing 310 telephone calls making test calls 313 telephone pin designations 244 251 telephones connecting 241 emergency transfer 274 275 terminal alarm notification a
296. ts of individually sheathed 25 pair cables with a factory installed 25 pair connector on each end Use a male to female cable to connect between the equipment room and site location or adapter Use a male to male cable to connect between the equipment room and satellite location Staggered finger cables are recommended for all multiple 25 pair station cables and are available in both double ended and single ended types Single modular plug ended 4 pair station cable Use this cable between adapters and information outlets that require push on connections It can also be used when 4 pair station cables are field terminated on the 110 type terminal blocks in the equipment room or satellite closet and modularly connected to information outlets The station cables are available in the following lengths lt 10ft 3 05 m 25 ft 7 62 m 50 ft 15 24 m October 2002 161 Station Wiring Design 75ft 22 86 m 100 ft 30 5 m 150 ft 45 72 m 200 ft 61 m gt NOTE If more than 200 ft 61 m of 4 pair station cable is required a 451A in line adapter double ended modular female connector is attached to the cable and a second 4 pair cable of the required length is plugged into the adapter See Example of Extending 4 Pair Station Cables Double modular plug ended 4 pair station cable Use this cable to provide nonstandard length runs between adapters and information outlets with push on connections It can also be used be
297. tween adapters and modularly connected information outlets It is available in the same lengths as the single modular plug ended cable Bulk Cable Same as the 25 pair cable or multiple 25 pair cable however the bulk cable is not equipped with connectors Use this cable between the equipment room and satellite closets when both are equipped with punch down type terminal connecting blocks 4 pair station cable Use this cable when 4 pair station cables are to be field terminated on the 110 type terminal blocks in the equipment room or satellite closet and the information outlets require push on connections Closets Site Locations Site locations are closets that provide a point in the station wiring for the administration of remote powering Adapters are used at site locations to terminate the 25 pair station cables and provide connection points modular jacks for power adapters and 4 pair station cables The258A and BR2580A adapters plug into a 25 pair female cable connector These adapters divide the 25 pair cable into six 4 pair modular jack circuits See 258A and BR2580A Adapters on page 163 The 356A adapter plugs into a 25 pair female cable connector See 356A Adapter on page 164 The 356A adapter divides the 25 pair cable into eight 3 pair circuits Although the circuits are 3 pair the adapters modular jacks will accept the 8 wide modular plug used on the 4 pair station cable A CAUTION Adapters
298. umper Installation and Administration Cable Routing Through Cable Slack Manager SCC OC OO O 9 M MMC CON 1758155 CJL 031496 Figure notes 1 Top of Media Gateways 6 Cable Slack Manager Cover 2 Cable Clamps Removed 3 Cable Ties Optional 7 Main Distribution Frame MDF 4 Power Cord 8 Route Cables Along Path Shown 5 Cable Slack Manager 9 Port Cables Install Sneak Fuse Panels For general information see Sneak Fuse Panels on page 152 The Model 507B Sneak Fuse Panel on page 189 or equivalent is recommended for sneak current protection The panel contains two 25 pair connectors fuse removal tool and fifty 220029 sneak fuses and two spares See Sneak Fuse Connector Pinout on page 189 for pinout data 1 Locate the 507B near the network interface or the Main Distribution Frame MDF October 2002 189 Patch Cord Jumper Installation and Administration Hold the panel against the mounting surface and mark the mounting screw locations Drill pilot holes at the marked locations and partially install a locally obtained 12 x 3 4 inch screw into the two bottom mounting slots Slide the sneak fuse panel onto t
299. unications link to the media server is down solid on DS1 Converter active This is the normal state for an active DS1 Converter solid off DS1 Converter standby This is the normal state for a standby DS1 Converter in critical reliability configurations duplicated PNC October 2002 329 Testing the Complete Configuration SPAN LEDs The 4 SPAN LEDs indicate the status of the 4 T1 E1 facilities A SPAN LED is in one of the following states e Solid on yellow Facility is operational and alarm free e Blinking yellow for 2 seconds off 0 1 seconds Facility is operational and alarm free AND is carrying the control channel facility A or B only e Solid on red Facility is alarmed e Solid off Facility is not administered or has been busied out October 2002 330 Testing the Complete Configuration October 2002 Troubleshooting an Installation Troubleshooting an Installation This section provides some simple strategies for troubleshooting an installation of an 8700 Media Server It focuses on possible problems when Installing the Media Server Hardware on page 331 e Configuring the Media Server Hardware on page 332 Installing the License and Avaya Authentication Files on page 333 Installing the Media Server Hardware The media server hardware includes the e Avaya S8700 Media Servers Ethernet switch Uninterruptible Power Supply e TN2312AP IP Server Interface Problem
300. unplug and plug in if it is already plugged in While the letters IP are flashing on the LED display five seconds press the recessed push button on the faceplate of the circuit pack The TN2312 is now ready to have another static IP address programmed or a Switch ID and Cabinet number programmed for use in a DHCP configuration gt NOTE When the IPSI circuit pack is first inserted into a carrier the faceplate LED display may present random characters dots or lines This should not last more than one second Ignore the display during this period Using DHCP addressing For the IPSI circuit packs to get IP addresses dynamically you must first assign the switch ID A through J and the cabinet number 01 through 64 to each IPSI circuit pack 1 Fully insert the TN2312 IPSI circuit pack If necessary reseat the circuit pack to begin the programming sequence For high and critical reliability configurations make sure the IPSI being programmed is the standby tone clock gt NOTE You must do the following steps within 5 seconds after inserting the circuit pack 2 Inserta pen golf tee or similar object no graphite pencil into the recessed push button switch October 2002 207 Connect the Hardware OG fpdiled3 LJK 022502 BENE gt NOTE If you have only one multi connect configuration the default switch ID is A which was administered earlier The second configuration would be B a
301. up wizard to install ASA on your computer gt NOTE The following procedure establishes a record for use when connected to the dedicated Avaya services port If this record already exists from a previous installation this procedure is not required 4 On your computer launch Avaya Site Administration October 2002 58 Customizing the Active Media Server 5 Clickon File New Switch 6 Follow the Add Switch wizard to build a record e Give the record a name that indicates it works with all Avaya S8700 Media Servers such as S8700 Service Port Select Network Connection as the connection method Use IP address 192 11 13 6 Use port 5023 7 When the record is established test it by connecting to the media server Remotely over the network The following administration is done on a computer connected to the customer s LAN The Avaya Site Administration switch record to connect to the active media server will be unique for each customer 1 Under Telephony Administration click Download ASA to download Avaya Site Administration 1 11 to the computer 2 Follow the steps in the Setup wizard to install ASA on the computer gt NOTE The following procedure establishes a record for use when connected to the Avaya 88700 Media Server 3 On the computer launch Avaya Site Administration 4 Click on File gt New gt Switch 5 Follow the Add Switch wizard to build a record e Give the record a name that indicates it will
302. usiness Communications Terminals BCTs and Business Communications Systems BCS 510D BCT 513 BCT 515 BCT 615 BCT 715 BCT 715 BCS PC PBX platform digital PC ISDN platform BRI Consoles 301A Attendant Console 302A1 Enhanced Generic 1 Console 602A1 ACD Console CallMaster amp digital communications terminal Voice Analog voice Analog voice Hybrid voice Digital voice Analog voice Digital voice BRI voice Data Data and voice October 2002 171 Voice and Data Terminals Voice and Data Terminals Type ZE01A Expansion Module for 8434Dx Voice and Features Cordless Hybrid Voice MDW 9000 TransTalk 9000 MDC 9000 DCP Data interface Data and Constellation Automatic Call Distribution ACD data terminal voice PassageWay interface Data and Consoles voice 302B1 302C1 Attendant Console 603A D Automatic Call Distribution ACD Console CallMaster digital console 603E Automatic Call Distribution ACD Console CallMaster digital console October 2002 172 Administration Terminals Administration Terminals Administration of the Avayal M MultiVantage Software is accomplished via Web interface This requires a Netscape or Internet Explorer browser Administration of the AvayalM Multi Vantage Software is accomplished via Avaya Site Administration Avaya SA Avaya SA is available on the 8700 Media Server October 2002 173 Layout Layout This section has information
303. ut call processing continues uninterrupted Ifthe countdown timer expires the switch runs in Administration Mode only and the call processing capability is limited to incoming and outgoing calls only to pre administered numbers gt NOTE The init login can no longer change the customer options offer option or special applications forms Access to Avaya MultiVantage Software is restricted the bearer network does not provide normal call processing The Avaya authentication files enable Access Security Gateway ASG for the services logins on the 8700 Media Server ASG uses a challenge response protocol to confirm the validity of a user reducing the opportunity for unauthorized access Before starting the installation or ideally before coming on site the license and Avaya authentication files may be downloaded to the services laptop The license and Avaya authentication files are installed during the installation process gt NOTE To access the RFA application you must take the RFA online training and pass the online test RFA information requirements for new installations You need the following information before going to the RFA website e Your personal Single Sign On SSO for RFA website authentication login October 2002 24 Download license and Avaya Authentication files SAP order number e Required customer information Serial number of one of the TN2312 IP server interface circuit packs this becom
304. uta length of 6 AWG 40 4 mm wire long enough to reach between the DC power cabinet and the DC battery cabinet See Frame Ground Wiring Between cabinet and Battery Cabinet on page 108 2 Crimp a terminal lug on the each end of the wire The terminal lugs are furnished as part of D 181895 kit of parts 3 Atthe DC battery cabinet attach the 6 AWG 2540 6 4 mm wire to the frame ground mounting hole using a pan head slotted screw star washer and hex nut Tighten the screw securely 4 Route the opposite end of the wire to the DC power cabinet 5 Attach the 6 AWG 40 4 mm wire to the mounting hole in the top of the cabinet Use a pan head slotted screw star washer and hex nut Tighten the screw securely October 2002 108 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Frame Ground Wiring Between cabinet and Battery Cabinet dc rect RBP 052996 Figure notes 1 6 AWG 40 Amm Wire 5 Terminal Lug Part of D 18181895 2 DC Battery Cabinet 6 Pan Head Slotted Screw 3 DC power cabinet 7 Star Washer 4 Grounding Hole in Top of cabinet 8 Hex Nut Connect DC Power Distribution Unit Ground 1 Measure and cut a length of 6 AWG 40 4 mm wire long enough to reach between the GROUND DISCHARGE bar in the DC power cabinet and the GRD connector on the DC powered Distribution Unit See Ground for the DC Powered Distribution Unit on page 109 2 Atthe cabinet conne
305. vaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Install Rear Panels 1 Install the rear panels and loosely thread each screw See Rear Panel Screw Locations on page 122 2 Forun stacked media gateways tighten the screws securely For a stack of media gateways allow the screws labeled callout 4 to remain loose These screws are tightened when the ground plates are installed 3 Besure the Time Division Multiplexing TDM bus cables and the Inter Cabinet Cables ICC are not pinched by the panels Also be sure the cables are routed through the channels provided on the rear panels Rear Panel Screw Locations III LU Ne W ILLU NW grnd plt CJL 030696 Figure notes 1 Expansion Control Media Gateway A No ground plate is installed on an un stacked media gateway 2 Rear Ground Plate attached between stacked media gateways 3 Port Media Gateway B 4 Screws to Loosen October 2002 123 Installing an Avaya SCC1 Media Gateway Stack Install Rear Ground Plates Media Gateways with Earthquake Protection Ground plates are installed between stacked media gateways provide the ground connection between media gateways provide radio frequency RF radiation protection and help stabilize the media gateways 1 Loosen the four screws at the bottom of the top media gateway and at the top of the media gateway underneath it See Rear Panel Screw Locations on page 122 Ali
306. vice to the information outlet as shown in 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity on page 276 and Example Adjunct Power Connections on page 254 2 Administer per the Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity 9 9 li I _ 26 1 i ye 1 E 1 rd 1 2 2 2 2 I 27 3 3 3 3 I 9 2 4 4 4 4 9 f gt 28 5 5 5 5 3 6 6 6 6 I li 7 7 7 li I o wid 3pm PDH 011397 Figure notes 1 Port Circuit Pack 4 Inputto Information Outlet 2 Media Gateway Connector 4 Pair Modularity Pins 5 Adjunct Power ip Bate Moditanty 6 Output From Information Outlet 3 Main Distribution Frame 4 Pair Modularity MDF Pins 3 Pair Modularity 7 Voice or Data Terminal Pins October 2002 277 Installing and Wiring Telephones Install the Queue Warning Indicator The connections for the queue warning indicator are the same as external ringing An AC indicator lamp such as a 21C49 can be used in a Uniform Call Distribution Direct Departmental Calling UCD DDC queue The lamp is connected to an information outlet The media gateway side of the MDF is connected to an analog line circuit pack located in a port carrier 1 Wire the queue warning indicator to the information outlet as shown in 3 Pair and 4 Pair Modularity on page 276 and Example Adjunct Power Connections on page 254 October 2002 278 Installing a
307. wer cabinet on page 82 shows a typical power and ground layout for a DC power cabinet The size of the wire required for the 48 volt DC and 48 volt return must ensure the voltage supplied by the battery plant is maintained between 42 5 and 54 2 volts DC at all times for proper operation and to prevent hardware damage The wire must be sized for a maximum voltage drop of 0 5 VDC in each leg of the DC distribution Connect DC Power and Ground Perform these tasks to connect DC power and ground power distribution unit J58890CH 1 Only Install Rectifier Modules and Battery Interface Unit on page 82 Connect Power and Ground s on page 83 Perform these tasks to connect DC Power and Ground J58890CF Only gt NOTE These installation tasks correspond to the numbers in Typical Power and Ground for a DC power cabinet on page 82 e Install Coupled Bonding Conductor Wires on page 86 e Connect Grounds for DC Battery and Power Cabinets on page 86 e Connect DC Power cabinet Approved Ground on page 86 e Connect AC Power to DC Power cabinet on page 87 e Connect Ground Wires for DC Power Systems on page 87 e Turn Circuit Breakers Off on page 87 e Connect DC Power to the Media Gateways on page 88 e Connect DC Battery Cabinet to DC Power Cabinet on page 89 If necessary Connect Mixed AC DC Power and Ground on page 89
308. wer modules OFF Plug the AC power cable into the receptacle Connect Fiber Optic Interconnect Cabling Signals between the PN with the center stage switch for convenience called PN1 and the other PNs are carried by fiber optic cables Lightwave transceivers provide the required fiber optic interface The fiber optic cables from the center stage switch route to a Lightguide Interconnect Unit LIU or fiber optic shelf Use multimode fiber transceivers and multimode fiber optic cables between media gateways unless single mode fiber is required distance restrictions Use metallic cables between carriers A CAUTION The PN with the center stage switch may contain a Class 1 LASER device if a single mode fiber optic cable is connected to a remote port network Make the required connections for the installation e Connect Fiber Optic Cables on page 95 e Connect Duplex or High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 95 e Connect High Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 96 e Connect Critical Reliability CSS Connected PN1 with 1 Switch Node on page 97 October 2002 Installing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway Connect Fiber Optic Cables gt NOTE Always use the Cable Running List that accompanies the 8700 Multi Connect configuration when installing fiber optic cables The following procedure is a typical example of how to cable a 8700 Multi Connect configuration If the m
309. wired similarly to the 356A should not be used Their jacks do not accept 4 pair plugs October 2002 162 Station Wiring Design Use theZD8AJ adapter to connect a Multi button Electronic Telephone MET line cord to an information outlet The adapter interchanges pairs 3 and 4 to correspond with the pair assignments for the telephone The line cord plugs into the adapter and then the adapter plugs into an information outlet Satellite Locations Satellite locations are closets that provide an administration point using cross connect equipment for station cables and where adjunct power may be applied The station cable circuits from the equipment room MDF are 3 pair At the satellite location 4 pair circuits run to the information outlets The hardware used is 110 type terminal blocks Satellite Locations Using 110 Type Hardware Each terminal block has a 3 pair white field and a 4 pair blue field located on the same terminal block The 110A type terminal block that can be used is the 110AEI 75FT It must be field terminated to both the white and blue fields The 300 pair 110P type terminal blocks that can be used are e IOPEI 300CT FT 25 pair connector on the white field and field terminated on the blue field 110PE1 300FT Field terminated on both the white and blue fields The 900 pair 110P type terminal blocks that can be used are e IOPEI 900CT FT 25 pair connector on the white field and field terminated o
310. wn a 120A Integrated CSU ICSU may be used Contact your Avaya representative for maximum cabling distances for the 3127 series CSU or the 120A ICSU Typical Connections to Channel Service Unit 0012 1 RBP 062696 Figure notes 1 Connector to DS1 Interface Circuit Pack 5 R Ring 2 C6C Cable For Distances Over 50 ft 6 T1 Tip 1 15 m Use C6E Cable s 7 RI Ring 1 3 TI Channel Service Unit CSU 3150 8 1 544 Mbps Digital Service Shown Interface 4 T Tip 9 To T1 Carrier October 2002 248 Installing and Wiring Telephones DS1 Cables Connector Cable Description and Usage C6C connector cable C6D connector cable C6E connector cable C6F connector cable 50 ft 15 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on one end and a 15 pin male connector on the other end Use this cable to connect a DS1 tie trunk circuit pack to a Channel Service Unit CSU 50 ft 15 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on each end Use this cable to connect a DS1 tie trunks in collocated cabinets 100 ft 31 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on one end and a 50 pin female connector on the other end Use this cable as an extension cable between the DS1 tie trunk circuit pack and other connector cables 50 ft 15 m shielded cable equipped with a 50 pin male connector on one end and a 3 in 8 cm
311. wnloading Avaya authentication file 23 license file 23 Installing the S8700 Multi Connect 337 Index DS1 converter circuit pack LEDs 327 DS1 tie trunks wiring 246 duplicated media server interchange testing 308 duplication cables connecting 43 E earthquake protection 123 124 earthquake protection MCC 68 69 earthquake protection SCC 103 electromagnetic compatibility standards 3 electromagnetic shielding 124 emergency transfer panel installing 269 emergency transfer telephones 274 275 emergency transfer units 266 emergency transfer testing 315 enable Ethernet switch ports 294 EPN cabinets cabinet location 103 equipment room cabling labels 153 equipment room cable routing 154 equipment room station circuit distribution from 165 Ethernet switch disabling unused ports 294 expanded power distribution unit 284 expansion interface circuit packs testing 310 expansion interface exchange testing 311 expansion links service state 307 external alarm cable connecting 93 external alarm indicators connecting 257 external alarm wiring 243 258 external ringing installing 276 external ringing testing 314 F faceplates TN2312AP circuit pack 324 fiber optic cable critical reliability CSS system 97 direct connect systems 94 high reliability CSS system 96 installing 95 standard reliability CSS system 95 fiber optic cable connecting 127 floor plans 173 frame ground 107 fron
312. ximum number of terminals or adjuncts is 32 at less than or equal to 6 25 watts each The 1145B22 is required for installations outside the United States Auxiliary power local or bulk is always required for the following Attendant Console 302D e PassageWay adapter interface October 2002 281 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies 1145B2 1146B2 Mounting Arrangement 1149 Battery On Battery Reserve Q 1145 Power Unit Charging Batery Output Power On 1146 Power Distribution Unit TTI o0000000000009000 7 Em 4 I QW ES S ra 1 8 s i i t 9 Q e M 24 0003 1 PDH 062596 Figure notes 1 Wall Mounting Plate 5 Power Cable 2 Battery 1149B Shown 6 Nonswitched Outlet 120 VAC 20 amp 3 1146B2 Power Distribution Unit on 220 NAC Jocamp 4 1145B2 Power Unit 7 Battery Backup Switch Setting October 2002 282 Installing and Wiring Telephone Power Supplies Expanded Power Distribution Unit 1149 Battery 000000000000000 1146 Power Distribution Unit 0000000000000 00 0 On Battery Reserve o9 1145 Power Unit Charging Battery 2 Output Power On JAJAA 0000000000000000 1146 Power Di
313. xternal Ringing Test Queue Warning Indicator Test Integrated Announcement Test Music on Hold Test Emergency Transfer S8700 Multi Connect only o ON Oo Oo F WO I Test Remote Access Interface e Test Terminating Trunk Transmission Test the C LAN Connectivity Test Stratum 3 Clock if used S8700 Multi Connect only 13 Resolve Alarms N Make Test Calls Make 2 calls from 1 telephone to another telephone Make the first call by dialing a telephone and make the second call by dialing a trunk access code and a Listed Directory Number LDN Test 302C Attendant Console Check all lamps are operational and call another telephone in the configuration 1 Simultaneously press and hold the Ringer Volume up button and the POS BUSY button This puts the console in the self test mode gt NOTE Releasing the buttons returns the console to normal mode 2 Verify all lamps on display light and remain lighted October 2002 314 Testing the Complete Configuration Each row of lamps on the console lights and goes dark in sequence from top to bottom 3 Press Start and listen for dial tone 4 The green lamp associated with Idle Call Appearance lights up The Position Available lamp goes dark 5 Dial number associated with a working telephone Audible ringing tone is heard in ear piece 6 Press Release Audible ringing tone is silenced The green lamp
314. y be added to either a S8700 Multi Connect or IP Connect configuration To add a G700 Media Gateway you must have a TN799DP C LAN circuit pack installed in the MCC1 SCC1 or G600 Media Gateway The G700 is an endpoint on the C LAN circuit pack A sample configuration is shown in Sample configuration showing an Avaya MCCI Media Gateway with an Avaya G700 Media Gateway on page 140 The general process for adding an Avaya G700 Media Gateway to an existing Avaya MCCI SCC1 or G600 Media Gateway follows Install the MCC1 SCC1 or G600 Media Gateway Install and configure the G700 Media Gateway Add the media gateway to the 8700 translations Install a TN799DP V5 or higher C LAN circuit pack Administer the C LAN circuit pack by Adding the node names and IP addresses for each G700 Media Gateway being added on the IP Node Names screen e Filling in the required fields on the IP Interfaces screen Enabling the Ethernet port Refer to Administer the TN799DP on page 219 for more information on administering a TN799DP C LAN circuit pack For complete information on how to install and configure an Avaya G700 Media Gateway refer to Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G700 Media Gateway controlled by an Avaya 6300 Media Server or an Avaya 88700 Media Server 555 234 100 October 2002 140 Installing the Avaya G700 Media Gateway Sample configuration showing an Avaya MCC1 Media Gateway with an Avaya G700 Med

Installing the Avaya S8700 Media Server with Avaya MCC1 or SCC1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents